1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures true
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 0
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 0
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 0
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes true
144 \output_changes false
148 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
149 \author 274215730 "scott"
150 \author 424524441 "rgheck"
161 by the \SpecialChar LyX
166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
168 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
169 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
170 Documentation mailing list:
171 \begin_inset CommandInset href
173 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
185 \begin_inset Newline newline
189 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 \begin_inset Note Note
196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
197 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
198 \begin_inset Newline newline
203 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
204 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
212 \begin_layout Standard
213 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
214 LatexCommand tableofcontents
221 \begin_layout Chapter
225 \begin_layout Section
226 What is \SpecialChar LyX
230 \begin_layout Standard
232 is a document preparation system.
233 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
234 scripts, publishable books, business
235 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
236 It is unlike most other
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
244 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
246 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
262 pt type, left justified, 5
263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
272 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
276 \begin_layout Standard
277 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
282 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
286 \begin_layout Standard
291 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
292 's philosophy: most importantly,
293 the format of all of the manuals.
294 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
295 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
301 manual describes that, too.
304 \begin_layout Section
309 \begin_layout Standard
310 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
311 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
313 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
314 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
318 \begin_layout Standard
319 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
320 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
321 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
323 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
324 only a vertical scrollbar.
325 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
326 The first case is large images.
327 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
328 image and use the option
339 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
342 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
343 this doesn't work for equations yet.
346 \begin_layout Standard
347 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
348 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
356 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
363 \begin_layout Section
367 \begin_layout Standard
368 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
370 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
372 Just select the manual you want to read from the
379 \begin_layout Section
380 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
384 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
391 \begin_layout Standard
392 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
393 can be configured via the menu
395 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
399 \begin_inset Index idx
402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
409 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
411 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
412 packages are available.
413 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
415 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
417 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
422 \begin_inset space \space{}
425 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
426 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
428 To force \SpecialChar LyX
429 to re-inspect your system, you should use
431 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
435 \begin_inset Index idx
438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
439 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
445 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
446 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
449 \begin_layout Section
452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
454 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
461 \begin_layout Standard
462 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
463 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
464 installed, but you will not be
465 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
466 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
467 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
468 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
469 document can always be output as plain text
473 \begin_layout Standard
474 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
475 or DocBook classes or packages.
476 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
477 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
480 \begin_layout Standard
481 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
482 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
483 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
486 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
494 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
495 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
498 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
502 \begin_inset Index idx
505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
506 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
514 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
521 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
525 \begin_layout Chapter
526 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
530 \begin_layout Section
531 Basic File Operations
532 \begin_inset Index idx
535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
544 \begin_layout Standard
549 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
550 in addition to some more advanced operations:
553 \begin_layout Itemize
575 \begin_layout Itemize
591 arg "buffer-new-template"
597 \begin_layout Itemize
619 \begin_layout Itemize
629 \begin_layout Itemize
643 \begin_layout Itemize
665 \begin_layout Itemize
677 arg "buffer-write-as"
683 \begin_layout Itemize
697 \begin_layout Itemize
711 \begin_layout Standard
712 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
713 a few minor differences.
716 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
727 command lists the available templates.
728 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
729 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
730 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
738 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
745 \begin_layout Standard
746 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
778 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
779 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
780 is just that — a big, blank space.
788 \begin_layout Standard
809 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
814 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
817 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
835 will reload the document from disk.
836 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
837 and want to restore it to the last save.
846 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
847 them as your changes.
850 \begin_layout Section
851 Basic Editing Features
852 \begin_inset Index idx
855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
864 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
871 \begin_layout Standard
872 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
873 can perform cut and paste operations
874 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
875 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
876 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
877 editing features and how to access
879 We will start with cut and paste.
882 \begin_layout Standard
883 As you might expect, the
887 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
888 various other editing features.
889 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
893 \begin_layout Itemize
899 \begin_inset Index idx
902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
931 \begin_layout Itemize
937 \begin_inset Index idx
940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
969 \begin_layout Itemize
975 \begin_inset Index idx
978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1003 \begin_layout Itemize
1007 \begin_inset space ~
1013 \begin_layout Itemize
1017 \begin_inset space ~
1023 \begin_layout Itemize
1027 \begin_inset space ~
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_inset Index idx
1040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1049 \begin_inset Index idx
1052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1067 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1077 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1083 \begin_layout Standard
1084 The first three are self-explanatory.
1085 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1086 and other programs by
1107 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1108 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1113 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1114 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1115 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1116 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1117 into individual cells.
1121 \begin_inset space ~
1126 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1127 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1131 \begin_layout Standard
1135 \begin_inset space ~
1140 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1142 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1157 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1158 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1159 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1165 \begin_inset space \space{}
1168 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1169 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1172 \begin_inset space ~
1175 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1177 \begin_inset space ~
1181 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1185 \begin_inset space ~
1194 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1195 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1197 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1201 \begin_inset space ~
1206 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1207 start a new paragraph.
1208 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1209 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1214 \begin_inset space ~
1217 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1231 \begin_inset space ~
1234 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1237 paste from the primary selection.
1238 This is normally the currently selected text.
1241 \begin_layout Standard
1244 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1246 \begin_inset space ~
1250 \begin_inset space ~
1258 \begin_inset space ~
1262 \begin_inset space ~
1268 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1274 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1277 \begin_inset space ~
1286 \begin_inset space ~
1291 button to skip the current word.
1295 \begin_inset space ~
1300 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1304 \begin_inset space ~
1309 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1311 If the toggle is set, searching for
1312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1323 will not match the word
1324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1338 Match whole words only
1340 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1341 to only find complete words, e.
1342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1371 offers also an advanced
1374 \begin_inset space ~
1378 \begin_inset space ~
1383 feature that is described in section
1384 \begin_inset space ~
1388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1390 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1397 \begin_layout Standard
1398 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1399 \begin_inset space \space{}
1403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1411 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1413 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1418 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1425 \begin_layout Standard
1429 arg "inset-select-all"
1432 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1433 When the cursor is inside an inset
1436 arg "inset-select-all"
1439 selects the content of the inset.
1443 arg "inset-select-all"
1446 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1451 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1454 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1458 \begin_layout Section
1460 \begin_inset Index idx
1463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1470 \begin_inset Index idx
1473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1482 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1489 \begin_layout Standard
1490 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1492 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1495 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1498 or the toolbar button
1504 to undo some mistake.
1505 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1507 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1510 or the toolbar button
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1524 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1528 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1531 \begin_layout Standard
1532 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1541 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1542 This is a consequence of the 100
1543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 step undo limit mentioned above.
1549 \begin_layout Standard
1558 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1560 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1564 \begin_layout Section
1566 \begin_inset Index idx
1569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1578 \begin_layout Standard
1579 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1582 \begin_layout Enumerate
1587 \begin_layout Itemize
1592 once anywhere in the edit window.
1593 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1597 \begin_layout Enumerate
1602 \begin_layout Itemize
1609 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1612 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1615 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1616 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1619 \begin_layout Itemize
1620 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1623 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1630 \begin_layout Enumerate
1631 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1635 \begin_layout Standard
1636 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1637 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1641 \begin_layout Section
1643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1645 name "sec:Navigating"
1650 \begin_inset Index idx
1653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1662 \begin_layout Standard
1664 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1667 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1673 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1676 \begin_layout Itemize
1677 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1679 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1681 \begin_inset space ~
1686 or by the toolbar button
1689 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1695 \begin_layout Itemize
1696 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1698 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1701 and use the same menu to return to them.
1702 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1705 \begin_layout Standard
1709 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1714 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1717 \begin_inset space ~
1722 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1723 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1724 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1725 your last editing position.
1728 \begin_layout Standard
1733 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1737 \begin_layout Subsection
1739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1741 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1746 \begin_inset Index idx
1749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1750 Navigating ! Outline
1756 \begin_inset Index idx
1759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1768 \begin_layout Standard
1769 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1770 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1771 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1773 \begin_inset space ~
1777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1779 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1783 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1784 \begin_inset space ~
1788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1790 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1795 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1799 \begin_layout Standard
1800 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1801 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1802 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1803 dialog and to modify the citation.
1806 \begin_layout Standard
1811 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1812 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1814 Labels and References
1816 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1825 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1828 \begin_layout Standard
1829 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1830 you further to control the display.
1835 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1836 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1842 option keeps it in the current view state.
1843 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1844 \begin_inset space ~
1847 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1848 \begin_inset space ~
1851 3, the subsections of sections
1852 \begin_inset space ~
1855 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1860 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1861 \begin_inset space ~
1865 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1875 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1878 \begin_layout Standard
1885 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1886 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1900 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1901 So, for example, you can move section
1902 \begin_inset space ~
1906 \begin_inset space ~
1909 2.4 or after section
1910 \begin_inset space ~
1915 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1928 (or the corresponding key bindings
1936 ) you can change the level of sections.
1937 So you can for example make section
1938 \begin_inset space ~
1942 \begin_inset space ~
1946 \begin_inset space ~
1952 \begin_layout Standard
1953 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1954 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1957 \begin_layout Subsection
1958 Horizontal Scrolling
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1963 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1971 \begin_layout Standard
1973 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1979 \begin_inset space \space{}
1983 \begin_inset space ~
1986 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1987 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1988 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1992 \begin_layout Standard
1993 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1997 \begin_layout Itemize
1999 is used on a small tablet computer
2002 \begin_layout Itemize
2003 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2015 \begin_inset space ~
2028 \begin_layout Itemize
2029 Math constructs with long command names
2032 \begin_layout Standard
2033 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2034 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2036 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2037 windows so that table
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2044 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2049 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2051 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2052 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2055 \begin_layout Standard
2056 \begin_inset Float table
2062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2063 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2068 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2072 Horizontal scrolling test.
2080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2082 \begin_inset Tabular
2083 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2084 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2087 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2129 \begin_layout Section
2130 Input/Word Completion
2131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2133 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2138 \begin_inset Index idx
2141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2148 \begin_inset Index idx
2151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2182 \begin_layout Standard
2184 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2186 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2187 is used to propose completions.
2190 \begin_layout Standard
2191 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2194 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2199 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2206 \begin_inset space ~
2210 \begin_inset space ~
2215 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2219 \begin_inset space ~
2224 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2225 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2229 \begin_inset space ~
2235 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2236 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2237 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2238 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2241 \begin_layout Standard
2243 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2244 completions available.
2249 key to accept a proposed completion.
2250 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2251 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2252 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2259 \begin_layout Standard
2260 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2261 ing options for text.
2262 The special math option
2266 enables characters to be composed.
2267 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2268 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2271 , you can then input the characters
2272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2283 to a formula to get it.
2284 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2285 of the math toolbar.
2286 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2290 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2291 's installation folder.
2292 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2301 \begin_layout Section
2303 \begin_inset Index idx
2306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2313 \begin_inset Index idx
2316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2345 \begin_inset Index idx
2348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2379 \begin_layout Standard
2380 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2394 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2397 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2401 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2402 \begin_inset space ~
2406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2408 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2415 \begin_layout Standard
2419 \begin_inset space ~
2427 \begin_inset space ~
2448 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2452 \begin_layout Labeling
2453 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2457 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2458 LatexCommand nomenclature
2460 description "Tabulator key"
2467 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2469 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2470 \begin_inset space ~
2474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2476 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2483 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2487 , especially section
2488 \begin_inset space ~
2492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2494 reference "subsec:Lists"
2500 If you are still confused, look in the
2505 \begin_inset Newline newline
2513 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2514 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2518 \begin_layout Labeling
2519 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2523 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2524 LatexCommand nomenclature
2526 description "Escape key"
2534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2541 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2542 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2545 \begin_layout Labeling
2546 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2552 \begin_inset space ~
2556 \begin_inset space ~
2563 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2564 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2568 \begin_layout Standard
2569 There are three modifier keys:
2572 \begin_layout Labeling
2573 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2591 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2592 LatexCommand nomenclature
2594 description "Control key"
2599 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2600 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2604 \begin_layout Itemize
2613 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2616 \begin_layout Itemize
2625 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2628 \begin_layout Itemize
2637 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2641 \begin_layout Labeling
2642 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2660 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2661 LatexCommand nomenclature
2663 description "Shift key"
2668 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2669 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2672 \begin_layout Labeling
2673 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2691 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2692 LatexCommand nomenclature
2694 description "Alt or Meta key"
2699 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2700 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2701 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2707 \begin_inset Newline newline
2710 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2712 menu accelerator keys
2715 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2716 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2720 \begin_layout Standard
2721 For example, the sequence
2722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2728 \begin_inset space ~
2732 \begin_inset space ~
2738 \begin_inset space ~
2746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2765 \begin_inset space ~
2771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2781 \begin_layout Standard
2786 manual lists all other things bound to the
2794 \begin_layout Standard
2795 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2797 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2798 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2799 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2800 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2801 The \SpecialChar LyX
2802 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2803 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2804 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2806 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2822 followed by a capital
2829 \begin_layout Chapter
2832 \begin_inset Index idx
2835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2845 \begin_layout Section
2847 \begin_inset Index idx
2850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2859 \begin_layout Subsection
2863 \begin_layout Standard
2864 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2865 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2866 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2867 numbering schemes, and so on.
2868 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2869 and format the title of your document differently.
2872 \begin_layout Standard
2877 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2878 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2879 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2880 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2881 picks one for you by default.
2882 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2885 \begin_layout Subsection
2887 \begin_inset Index idx
2890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2899 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2906 \begin_layout Standard
2907 You can select a class using the
2909 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2910 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2914 \begin_inset Index idx
2917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2924 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2928 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2932 \begin_layout Standard
2933 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2938 \begin_layout Description
2939 Article for basic articles
2942 \begin_layout Description
2943 Report for basic reports
2946 \begin_layout Description
2947 Book for writing a book
2950 \begin_layout Description
2951 Letter for US-style letters
2954 \begin_layout Standard
2955 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2956 only uses if you have installed
2957 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2958 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2959 distributions will include
2961 Here are some of the classes.
2962 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2964 Special Document Classes
2973 \begin_layout Description
2974 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2977 \begin_layout Description
2978 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2982 \begin_layout Description
2983 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2987 \begin_layout Description
2988 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2989 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2990 There are three article layouts available.
2991 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2992 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2993 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2994 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2999 sequential numbering
3000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3003 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3004 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3005 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3006 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3009 \begin_layout Description
3010 Beamer Layout for presentations
3013 \begin_layout Description
3014 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3015 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3016 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3017 with \SpecialChar LyX
3021 \begin_layout Description
3022 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3025 \begin_layout Description
3027 \begin_inset space ~
3030 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3033 \begin_layout Description
3034 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3037 \begin_layout Description
3038 Foils Used to make transparencies
3041 \begin_layout Description
3042 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3043 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3044 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3045 with \SpecialChar LyX
3049 \begin_layout Description
3050 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3051 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3054 \begin_layout Description
3055 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3058 \begin_layout Description
3059 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3062 \begin_layout Description
3063 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3064 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3065 (Is used by this document.)
3068 \begin_layout Description
3069 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3072 \begin_layout Description
3073 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3076 \begin_layout Description
3081 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3082 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3084 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3088 \begin_layout Description
3089 Slides Used to make transparencies
3092 \begin_layout Description
3094 \begin_inset space ~
3097 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3098 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3101 \begin_layout Description
3102 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3105 \begin_layout Standard
3106 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3108 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3110 Special Document Classes
3117 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3118 of the document classes.
3121 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3125 \begin_layout Standard
3126 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3128 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3129 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3131 \begin_inset Index idx
3134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3151 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3152 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3154 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3157 \begin_layout Standard
3160 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3165 , are highly specialized.
3167 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3168 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3169 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3170 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3171 by some document class.
3172 There are just too many of them.
3173 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3176 \begin_layout Standard
3177 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3185 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3186 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3187 document class for a new file.
3189 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3192 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3199 manual for information on how to install them.
3200 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3206 \begin_layout Standard
3207 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3208 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3209 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3210 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3211 class files to be used for dissertation
3212 s submitted to those universities.
3213 The \SpecialChar LyX
3214 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3216 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3220 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3226 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3229 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3233 name "subsec:Modules"
3238 \begin_inset Index idx
3241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3250 \begin_layout Standard
3251 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3252 chosen document class.
3253 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3254 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3261 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3265 \begin_inset Index idx
3268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3275 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3279 \begin_layout Standard
3280 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3281 packages or file format converters that are not always
3282 installed by default.
3284 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3285 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3286 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3287 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3289 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3290 file without the missing prerequisites.
3291 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3292 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3295 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3299 \begin_inset Index idx
3302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3303 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3309 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3314 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3317 \begin_layout Standard
3318 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3326 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3328 will advise you about these things.
3336 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3340 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3345 \begin_inset Index idx
3348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3349 Document ! Local Layout
3357 \begin_layout Standard
3358 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3359 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3360 : They are intended to be used in
3361 a variety of different documents.
3362 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3363 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3364 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3365 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3366 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3368 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3386 manual for information on how to use it.
3389 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3393 \begin_layout Standard
3394 Each class has a default set of options.
3395 Here's a quick table describing them:
3398 \begin_layout Standard
3399 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3405 \begin_layout Standard
3407 \begin_inset Tabular
3408 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3409 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3413 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3414 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3868 \begin_layout Standard
3869 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3875 \begin_layout Standard
3876 You're probably also wondering what
3877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3881 \begin_inset space ~
3885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3889 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3890 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3895 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3900 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3910 headings, there are also
3918 headings, and so on.
3919 We will describe these headings fully in section
3920 \begin_inset space ~
3924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3926 reference "subsec:Headings"
3933 \begin_layout Subsection
3935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3937 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3942 \begin_inset Index idx
3945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3952 \begin_inset Index idx
3955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3964 \begin_layout Standard
3965 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3967 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3974 \begin_inset space ~
3982 \begin_inset space ~
3987 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3989 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3990 doesn't support special options you want to
3991 use for your document.
3992 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3993 -class and its options, you have to read
3997 \begin_layout Standard
4001 \begin_inset space ~
4008 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4014 \begin_inset space ~
4019 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4020 You can choose between the following five options:
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4029 Use default page style of current class.
4032 \begin_layout Labeling
4033 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4038 No page numbers or headings.
4041 \begin_layout Labeling
4042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4050 \begin_layout Labeling
4051 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4056 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4057 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4058 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4059 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4062 \begin_layout Labeling
4063 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4068 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4069 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4075 \begin_inset Index idx
4078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4080 -packages ! fancyhdr
4086 How they are defined is explained in section
4087 \begin_inset space ~
4091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4093 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4100 \begin_layout Standard
4101 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4102 \begin_inset space ~
4106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4108 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4115 \begin_layout Subsection
4116 Paper Size and Orientation
4117 \begin_inset Index idx
4120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4121 Document ! Paper size
4127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4129 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4136 \begin_layout Standard
4137 You can find the following options in the menu
4140 \begin_inset space ~
4147 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4151 \begin_inset Index idx
4154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4163 \begin_layout Labeling
4164 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4168 \begin_inset space ~
4173 What size paper to print on.
4178 \begin_layout Itemize
4184 \begin_layout Itemize
4190 \begin_layout Itemize
4196 \begin_layout Itemize
4202 \begin_layout Itemize
4205 US letter, US legal, US executive
4208 \begin_layout Itemize
4214 \begin_layout Itemize
4221 \begin_layout Labeling
4222 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4227 To choose whether to output as
4238 \begin_layout Labeling
4239 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4243 \begin_inset space ~
4248 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4249 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4252 \begin_layout Subsection
4254 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4256 name "subsec:Margins"
4261 \begin_inset Index idx
4264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4271 \begin_inset Index idx
4274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4283 \begin_layout Standard
4284 Paper margins are set in the menu
4286 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4290 \begin_inset Index idx
4293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4302 \begin_layout Standard
4303 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4304 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4305 the paper format and the font size into account.
4308 \begin_layout Subsection
4312 \begin_layout Standard
4313 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4319 That includes the paragraph environments.
4320 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4321 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4322 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4324 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4333 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4335 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4336 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4337 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4340 \begin_layout Section
4341 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4342 \begin_inset Index idx
4345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4346 Paragraph ! Indentation
4354 \begin_layout Subsection
4356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4358 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4365 \begin_layout Standard
4366 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4367 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4370 \begin_layout Standard
4371 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4372 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4373 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4374 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4378 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4384 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4385 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4386 language than English.
4388 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4391 \begin_layout Standard
4392 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4393 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4394 into \SpecialChar LyX
4396 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4399 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4401 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4402 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4403 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4410 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4411 goes to produce a printable file.
4416 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4418 gives you the ability globally to change
4422 these pre-coded spacings.
4423 We will explain more later.
4426 \begin_layout Subsection
4427 Paragraph Separation
4428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4430 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4435 \begin_inset Index idx
4438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4439 Paragraph ! Separation
4447 \begin_layout Standard
4455 \begin_inset space ~
4463 \begin_inset space ~
4470 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4474 \begin_inset Index idx
4477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4483 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4486 \begin_layout Subsection
4490 \begin_layout Standard
4491 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4494 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4496 \begin_inset space ~
4501 dialog and toggle the
4504 \begin_inset space ~
4509 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4512 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4516 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4517 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4521 \begin_layout Standard
4522 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4523 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4526 \begin_layout Subsection
4528 \begin_inset Index idx
4531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4532 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4540 \begin_layout Standard
4543 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4547 \begin_inset Index idx
4550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4559 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4563 \begin_inset space ~
4572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4573 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4579 \begin_inset Index idx
4582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4584 -packages ! setspace
4589 installed to use this feature.
4594 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4596 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4598 \begin_inset space ~
4603 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4604 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4607 \begin_layout Section
4608 Paragraph Environments
4609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4611 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4616 \begin_inset Index idx
4619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4620 Paragraph ! Environments
4626 \begin_inset Index idx
4629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4630 Paragraph environments|(
4638 \begin_layout Subsection
4642 \begin_layout Standard
4643 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4646 \begin_layout Standard
4655 } \SpecialChar ldots
4665 \begin_inset Newline newline
4668 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4670 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4671 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4672 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4681 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4684 \begin_layout Standard
4685 A paragraph environment is simply a
4686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4693 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4694 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4695 scheme, labels, and so on.
4696 Additionally, you can
4697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4704 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4705 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4706 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4707 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4709 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4711 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4714 \begin_layout Standard
4715 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4716 \begin_inset Graphics
4717 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4723 at the left end of the toolbar.
4725 will change the environment of the
4729 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4730 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4731 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4735 \begin_layout Standard
4744 create a new paragraph using the
4748 paragraph environment.
4750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4757 because if you are in one of these environments:
4760 \begin_layout Itemize
4766 \begin_layout Itemize
4772 \begin_layout Itemize
4778 \begin_layout Itemize
4784 \begin_layout Itemize
4790 \begin_layout Itemize
4796 \begin_layout Itemize
4802 \begin_layout Standard
4804 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4808 , rather than resetting it to
4813 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4814 \begin_inset space ~
4818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4820 reference "sec:Nesting"
4827 \begin_layout Subsection
4831 \begin_layout Standard
4832 The default paragraph environment is
4837 It creates a plain paragraph.
4839 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4840 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4841 this manual) are in the
4848 \begin_layout Standard
4849 You can nest a paragraph using the
4853 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4861 \begin_layout Subsection
4863 \begin_inset Index idx
4866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4875 \begin_layout Standard
4876 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4877 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4886 for thanks or contact information.
4887 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4888 places all of this on a separate page
4889 along with today's date.
4890 For other types of documents, the title
4891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4898 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4902 \begin_layout Standard
4904 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4918 Here's how you use them:
4921 \begin_layout Itemize
4922 Put the title of your document in the
4929 \begin_layout Itemize
4930 Put the author name in the
4937 \begin_layout Itemize
4938 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4939 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4945 Note that using this environment is optional.
4946 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4947 will automatically insert today's date.
4948 If you don't want a date, use the option
4950 Suppress default date on front page
4954 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4955 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4957 \begin_inset space ~
4965 \begin_layout Standard
4966 You can use footnotes to insert
4967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4974 or contact information.
4977 \begin_layout Subsection
4979 \begin_inset Index idx
4982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4991 name "subsec:Headings"
4998 \begin_layout Standard
4999 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5001 takes care of the numbering for you.
5004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5006 \begin_inset Index idx
5009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5010 Section headings ! Numbered
5018 \begin_layout Standard
5019 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5023 \begin_layout Enumerate
5029 \begin_layout Enumerate
5035 \begin_layout Enumerate
5041 \begin_layout Enumerate
5047 \begin_layout Enumerate
5053 \begin_layout Enumerate
5059 \begin_layout Enumerate
5065 \begin_layout Standard
5067 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5068 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5069 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5072 \begin_layout Standard
5073 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5074 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5075 You group the book into chapters.
5077 does a similar grouping:
5080 \begin_layout Itemize
5085 is divided into either
5096 \begin_layout Itemize
5108 \begin_layout Itemize
5120 \begin_layout Itemize
5132 \begin_layout Itemize
5144 \begin_layout Itemize
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5157 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5165 Not all document types use the
5169 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5174 is the top-level heading.
5182 \begin_layout Standard
5187 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5188 labels it with its number,
5189 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5191 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5203 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5205 \begin_inset Index idx
5208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5209 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5217 \begin_layout Standard
5218 The unnumbered section headings have a
5219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5226 at the end of their name.
5227 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5228 the table of contents, see section
5229 \begin_inset space ~
5233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5243 Changing the Numbering
5244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5246 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5253 \begin_layout Standard
5254 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5255 in the Table of Contents.
5256 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5258 Just as certain classes start with
5272 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5282 This is something you can change.
5285 \begin_layout Standard
5288 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5292 \begin_inset Index idx
5295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5304 \begin_inset space ~
5308 \begin_inset space ~
5313 you will see two counters.
5318 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5319 numbers a section heading.
5320 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5324 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5325 Short Titles of Headings
5326 \begin_inset Index idx
5329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5330 Section headings ! Short titles
5336 \begin_inset Argument 1
5339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5348 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5355 \begin_layout Standard
5356 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5357 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5358 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5359 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5362 \begin_layout Standard
5364 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5365 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5366 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5367 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5370 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5372 \begin_inset space ~
5378 This will insert a box labeled
5379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5383 \begin_inset space ~
5387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5390 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5391 This also works for captions inside floats.
5392 There can only be one short title per title.
5395 \begin_layout Standard
5396 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5399 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5403 \begin_layout Standard
5404 The following information applies to all section headings:
5407 \begin_layout Itemize
5408 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5411 \begin_layout Itemize
5412 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5415 \begin_layout Itemize
5416 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5419 \begin_layout Itemize
5420 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5423 \begin_layout Subsection
5427 \begin_layout Standard
5429 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5443 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5444 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5445 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5446 the text they contain.
5447 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5455 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5458 \begin_layout Standard
5459 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5468 when you start a new paragraph.
5469 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5473 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5474 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5475 have to change back to the
5479 environment yourself.
5482 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5491 \begin_inset Index idx
5494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5503 \begin_layout Standard
5504 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5505 time for the differences.
5514 are identical except for one difference:
5518 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5527 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5530 \begin_layout Standard
5531 Here's an example of the
5544 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5546 See – no indentation!
5550 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5551 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5552 the other paragraph.
5555 \begin_layout Standard
5556 Here's another example, this time in the
5563 \begin_layout Quotation
5569 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5570 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5571 the first line, then
5575 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5579 you were quoting other text.
5582 \begin_layout Quotation
5583 Here's a new paragraph.
5584 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5585 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5588 \begin_layout Standard
5589 As the examples show,
5593 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5594 They should put quotes in the
5599 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5603 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5606 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5608 \begin_inset Index idx
5611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5618 \begin_inset Index idx
5621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5637 \begin_layout Standard
5642 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5648 \begin_inset Newline newline
5651 Which I did not rehearse!
5655 It could be much worse.
5656 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5658 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5659 indented a bit more than the first.
5660 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5666 \begin_inset Newline newline
5669 And make things look fine
5670 \begin_inset Newline newline
5676 arg "newline-insert newline"
5682 \begin_layout Standard
5687 does not indent both margins.
5688 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5689 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5692 arg "newline-insert newline"
5698 \begin_layout Subsection
5700 \begin_inset Index idx
5703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5719 \begin_layout Standard
5721 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5731 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5732 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5741 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5742 lets you provide your own label.
5743 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5744 describing some general features of all four of them.
5747 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5751 \begin_layout Standard
5752 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5754 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5755 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5764 reset the environment to
5768 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5769 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5770 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5774 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5778 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5785 \begin_layout Standard
5786 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5787 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5788 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5790 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5791 you read all of section
5792 \begin_inset space ~
5796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5798 reference "sec:Nesting"
5805 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5807 \begin_inset Index idx
5810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5826 \begin_layout Standard
5827 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5831 paragraph environment.
5832 It has the following properties:
5835 \begin_layout Itemize
5836 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5840 \begin_layout Itemize
5842 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5845 \begin_layout Itemize
5846 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5850 \begin_layout Itemize
5851 The items can have any length.
5853 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5854 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5861 \begin_layout Itemize
5866 environment inside another
5870 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5874 \begin_layout Itemize
5875 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5878 \begin_layout Itemize
5880 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5883 \begin_layout Itemize
5885 \begin_inset space ~
5889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5891 reference "sec:Nesting"
5895 for a full explanation of nesting.
5899 \begin_layout Standard
5900 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5909 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5912 \begin_layout Standard
5913 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5914 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5917 \begin_layout Itemize
5918 The label for the first level
5922 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5926 \begin_layout Itemize
5927 The label for the second level is a dash.
5931 \begin_layout Itemize
5932 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5936 \begin_layout Itemize
5937 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5941 \begin_layout Itemize
5942 Back out to the third level.
5946 \begin_layout Itemize
5947 Back to the second level.
5951 \begin_layout Itemize
5952 Back to the outermost level.
5955 \begin_layout Standard
5956 These are the default labels for an
5961 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5963 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5966 dialog in the submenu
5971 \begin_inset Index idx
5974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5980 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5984 \begin_layout Standard
5985 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5986 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5988 \begin_inset space ~
5992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5994 reference "sec:Nesting"
6001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6003 \begin_inset Index idx
6006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6015 name "sec:Enumerate"
6022 \begin_layout Standard
6027 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6028 It has these properties:
6031 \begin_layout Enumerate
6032 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6036 \begin_layout Enumerate
6037 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6041 \begin_layout Enumerate
6043 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6046 \begin_layout Enumerate
6051 environment resets the counter to one.
6054 \begin_layout Enumerate
6067 \begin_layout Enumerate
6068 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6069 Items can have any length.
6072 \begin_layout Enumerate
6073 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6076 \begin_layout Enumerate
6077 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6080 \begin_layout Enumerate
6081 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6085 \begin_layout Standard
6094 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6096 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6097 labels the four different levels in an
6104 \begin_layout Enumerate
6105 The first level of an
6109 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6113 \begin_layout Enumerate
6114 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6118 \begin_layout Enumerate
6119 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6123 \begin_layout Enumerate
6124 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6127 \begin_layout Enumerate
6128 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6133 \begin_layout Enumerate
6134 Back to the third level
6138 \begin_layout Enumerate
6139 Back to the second level.
6143 \begin_layout Enumerate
6144 Back to the outermost level.
6147 \begin_layout Standard
6148 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6152 environment, see section
6153 \begin_inset space ~
6157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6159 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6164 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6168 \begin_layout Standard
6169 There is more to nesting
6173 environments than we've stated here.
6174 You should read section
6175 \begin_inset space ~
6179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6181 reference "sec:Nesting"
6185 to learn more about nesting.
6188 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6190 \begin_inset Index idx
6193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6202 \begin_layout Standard
6203 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6207 list has no fixed label.
6208 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6217 of the first line as the label.
6221 \begin_layout Description
6222 Example: This is an example of the
6229 \begin_layout Standard
6231 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6235 \begin_layout Standard
6237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6244 it is meant that the first usage of the
6248 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6250 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6258 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6263 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6264 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6266 \begin_inset space ~
6272 \begin_inset space ~
6276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6278 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6282 for more information.) Here is an example:
6285 \begin_layout Description
6287 \begin_inset space ~
6290 Example: This one shows how to use a
6293 \begin_inset space ~
6305 \begin_layout Description
6306 Usage: You should use the
6310 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6311 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6313 It's not a good idea to use a
6317 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6318 You're better off using
6330 paragraphs into them.
6333 \begin_layout Description
6334 Nesting: You can nest
6338 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6342 \begin_layout Standard
6343 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6344 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6345 them from the first line.
6348 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6350 \begin_inset Index idx
6353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6362 \begin_layout Standard
6367 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6368 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6372 \begin_layout Standard
6381 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6383 Here are its properties:
6386 \begin_layout Labeling
6387 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6389 \begin_inset space ~
6392 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6401 of each line as the item label.
6406 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6407 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6408 space as described above.
6411 \begin_layout Labeling
6412 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6413 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6414 uses different margins for the item label and the
6415 body of the item text.
6416 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6417 label width plus a little extra space.
6421 \begin_layout Labeling
6422 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6424 \begin_inset space ~
6427 width \SpecialChar LyX
6428 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6429 If the label width is larger, the label
6430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6437 into the first line.
6438 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6439 margin of the rest of the item text.
6442 \begin_layout Labeling
6443 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6445 \begin_inset space ~
6448 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6453 environment has the same left margin.
6454 \begin_inset Newline newline
6457 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6460 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6462 \begin_inset space ~
6467 dialog (toolbar button
6470 arg "layout-paragraph"
6477 \begin_inset space ~
6482 determines the default label width.
6483 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6492 multiple times instead.
6493 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6503 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6506 \begin_inset space ~
6511 every time you alter a label in a
6516 \begin_inset Newline newline
6519 The predefined default width is the length of
6520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6528 \begin_inset space ~
6534 \begin_layout Standard
6539 list the same way as the
6543 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6549 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6553 \begin_layout Standard
6558 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6559 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6561 \begin_inset space ~
6565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6567 reference "sec:Nesting"
6571 to learn about nesting.
6574 \begin_layout Standard
6575 There is yet another feature of the
6579 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6580 left-justifies the item labels by
6582 You can use additional
6586 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6587 justifies the item label.
6592 are documented in section
6593 \begin_inset space ~
6597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6599 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6604 Here are some examples:
6607 \begin_layout Labeling
6608 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6609 Left The default for
6616 \begin_layout Labeling
6617 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6618 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6625 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6628 \begin_layout Labeling
6629 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6630 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6634 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6641 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6644 \begin_layout Subsection
6646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6648 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6653 \begin_inset Index idx
6656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6665 \begin_layout Standard
6666 The features described in this section require that the module
6668 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6670 is loaded in the document settings.
6671 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6677 \begin_inset Index idx
6680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6682 -packages ! enumitem
6690 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6691 Custom Enumerate Lists
6692 \begin_inset Index idx
6695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6696 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6704 \begin_layout Standard
6706 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6709 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6712 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6713 There you add the command
6716 \begin_layout Standard
6724 \begin_layout Standard
6736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6737 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6738 Code, look at section
6739 \begin_inset space ~
6743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6745 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6758 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6765 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6766 For capital Roman numerals replace
6778 in the command above.
6779 For Arabic numerals use
6787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6794 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6809 \begin_layout Standard
6811 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6819 You can only number 26
6820 \begin_inset space ~
6823 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6831 \begin_layout Standard
6832 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6833 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6836 \begin_layout Standard
6837 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6840 \begin_layout Enumerate
6841 \begin_inset Argument 1
6844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6870 \begin_layout Enumerate
6871 \begin_inset Argument 1
6874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6897 \begin_layout Enumerate
6902 \begin_layout Enumerate
6903 \begin_inset Argument 1
6906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6930 \begin_layout Enumerate
6931 \begin_inset Argument 1
6934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6960 \begin_layout Standard
6961 For this list these commands were used:
6964 \begin_layout Standard
6975 \begin_inset Newline newline
6983 \begin_inset Newline newline
6991 \begin_inset Newline newline
7001 \begin_layout Standard
7008 makes the label emphasized and
7017 \begin_layout Standard
7018 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7026 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7027 lists until you change the definition.
7035 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7037 \begin_inset Index idx
7040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7041 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7049 \begin_layout Standard
7050 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7053 \begin_layout Enumerate
7054 \begin_inset Argument 1
7057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7076 \begin_inset Note Note
7079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7080 goes back to default numbering
7088 \begin_layout Enumerate
7092 \begin_layout Standard
7096 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7100 \begin_layout Standard
7101 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7106 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7107 to indicate that it is a resumed
7108 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7109 , but in the output.
7112 \begin_layout Standard
7113 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7121 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7130 \begin_layout Standard
7131 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7133 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7134 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7135 of a normal enumeration.
7136 There, insert the command
7139 \begin_layout Standard
7145 \begin_layout Standard
7150 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7154 \begin_layout Enumerate
7158 \begin_layout Enumerate
7162 \begin_layout Standard
7163 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7166 \begin_layout Enumerate
7167 \begin_inset Argument 1
7170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7186 This enumeration starts at 4
7189 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7191 \begin_inset Index idx
7194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7203 \begin_layout Standard
7204 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7206 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7209 \begin_layout Itemize
7213 \begin_layout Itemize
7214 with standard spacing
7217 \begin_layout Standard
7218 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7220 Add there the command
7224 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7227 \begin_layout Itemize
7228 \begin_inset Argument 1
7231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7250 \begin_layout Itemize
7254 \begin_layout Itemize
7258 \begin_layout Standard
7259 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7266 \begin_inset Index idx
7269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7271 -packages ! enumitem
7277 For more information see its documentation,
7278 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7288 \begin_layout Standard
7289 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7291 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7292 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7296 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7299 \begin_layout Enumerate
7300 \begin_inset Argument 1
7303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7311 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7324 \begin_layout Enumerate
7325 with negative indentation
7328 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7329 Further Customization
7330 \begin_inset Index idx
7333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7334 Lists ! Customization
7342 \begin_layout Standard
7343 You can also change the style of description lists.
7347 \begin_layout Standard
7353 \begin_layout Standard
7354 changes the description label font, the command
7357 \begin_layout Standard
7363 \begin_layout Standard
7364 sets the list style.
7367 \begin_layout Standard
7368 An example where the command
7371 \begin_layout Standard
7376 itshape, style=nextline
7379 \begin_layout Standard
7383 \begin_layout Description
7385 \begin_inset space ~
7389 \begin_inset Argument 1
7392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7398 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7400 itshape, style=nextline
7410 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7411 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7415 \begin_layout Description
7417 \begin_inset space ~
7420 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7421 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7422 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7425 \begin_layout Standard
7426 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7432 \begin_inset Index idx
7435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7437 -packages ! enumitem
7443 For more information see its documentation
7444 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7454 \begin_layout Subsection
7456 \begin_inset Index idx
7459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7468 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7470 \begin_inset space ~
7473 Address: An Overview
7476 \begin_layout Standard
7477 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7478 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7486 \begin_inset space ~
7492 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7493 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7494 gags on the document.
7495 In contrast, you can use the
7502 \begin_inset space ~
7507 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7508 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7512 \begin_layout Standard
7513 Of course, you're not limited to using
7520 \begin_inset space ~
7529 \begin_inset space ~
7534 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7535 some European academic papers.
7538 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7542 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7549 \begin_layout Standard
7554 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7555 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7559 \begin_inset space ~
7564 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7565 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7566 Here's an example of each:
7569 \begin_layout Right Address
7571 \begin_inset Newline newline
7575 \begin_inset Newline newline
7579 \begin_inset Newline newline
7582 When is it? What is today?
7585 \begin_layout Standard
7589 \begin_inset space ~
7595 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7597 the largest block of text on a single line.
7598 Here's an example of the
7605 \begin_layout Address
7607 \begin_inset Newline newline
7610 Where do I send this
7611 \begin_inset Newline newline
7614 Your post office and country
7617 \begin_layout Standard
7618 As you can see, both
7625 \begin_inset space ~
7630 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7635 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7636 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7642 This makes sense, since
7650 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7651 Thus, you have to use
7658 arg "newline-insert newline"
7663 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7664 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7666 \begin_inset space ~
7670 \begin_inset space ~
7675 ) to start a new line in an
7682 \begin_inset space ~
7690 \begin_layout Subsection
7694 \begin_layout Standard
7695 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7696 or list of references.
7698 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7701 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7703 \begin_inset Index idx
7706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7715 \begin_layout Standard
7720 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7721 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7722 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7723 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7737 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7738 The book document classes ignores the
7742 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7746 in a letter document class.
7749 \begin_layout Standard
7754 environment does several things for you.
7755 First, it puts the centered label
7756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7764 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7766 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7767 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7768 the subsequent text.
7769 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7771 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7775 \begin_layout Standard
7776 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7780 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7781 The new paragraph will still be in the
7786 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7787 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7790 \begin_layout Standard
7791 \begin_inset Float figure
7796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7798 \begin_inset Graphics
7799 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7807 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7812 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7833 \begin_layout Standard
7834 We would love to demonstrate the
7838 environment, but since this document is in the
7839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7846 class, we can't do this.
7847 We inserted it therefore as figure
7848 \begin_inset space ~
7852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7854 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7859 If you have never heard of an
7860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7867 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7870 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7872 \begin_inset Index idx
7875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7884 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7891 \begin_layout Standard
7896 environment is used to list references.
7897 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7898 only use it at the end of the document.
7910 \begin_layout Standard
7911 When you first open a
7915 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7916 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7932 depending on the document class.
7933 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7934 Each paragraph of the
7938 environment is a bibliography entry.
7943 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7944 Each new paragraph is still in the
7951 \begin_layout Standard
7952 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7953 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7955 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7957 handling, have a look at section
7958 \begin_inset space ~
7962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7964 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7971 \begin_layout Subsection
7972 Special Environments
7975 \begin_layout Standard
7977 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7978 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7981 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7986 \begin_inset Index idx
7989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7997 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7999 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8006 \begin_layout Standard
8012 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8014 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8019 key as a fixed whitespace.
8023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8036 \begin_inset space ~
8041 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8059 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8062 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8065 arg "newline-insert newline"
8082 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8083 So, when you finish using the
8088 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8089 Also, you can nest the
8094 environment inside of others.
8097 \begin_layout Standard
8098 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8101 \begin_layout Itemize
8105 arg "newline-insert newline"
8108 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8113 \begin_inset space \space{}
8123 arg "newline-insert newline"
8129 \begin_layout Itemize
8133 arg "newline-insert newline"
8143 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8149 \begin_layout Itemize
8150 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8151 You must put at least one
8155 in any line you want blank.
8156 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8160 \begin_layout Itemize
8161 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8165 since that will insert
8170 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8173 arg "self-insert \""
8179 \begin_layout Standard
8183 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8187 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8191 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8195 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8199 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8200 printf("Hello World!
8205 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8209 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8213 \begin_layout Standard
8214 This is just the standard
8215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8226 \begin_layout Standard
8232 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8234 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8235 as if you used a typewriter.
8236 \begin_inset Index idx
8239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8240 Paragraph environments|)
8245 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8248 Program Code Listings
8253 \begin_inset space ~
8261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8265 \begin_inset Index idx
8268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8277 \begin_layout Standard
8282 environment is similar to the
8287 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8288 computer console text.
8293 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8307 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8308 you can have empty lines.
8321 \begin_layout Itemize
8322 have a certain language and a text style
8325 \begin_layout Itemize
8326 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8327 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8328 and \SpecialChar TeX
8332 \begin_layout Standard
8333 Because of these properties
8337 works like a typewriter.
8341 \begin_layout Verbatim
8346 \begin_layout Verbatim
8350 The following 2 lines are empty:
8353 \begin_layout Verbatim
8357 \begin_layout Verbatim
8361 \begin_layout Verbatim
8363 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8368 \begin_layout Standard
8373 environment is identical to
8377 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8378 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8385 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8390 \begin_layout Section
8391 Nesting Environments
8392 \begin_inset Index idx
8395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8396 Nesting ! Environments
8402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8411 \begin_layout Subsection
8415 \begin_layout Standard
8417 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8419 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8421 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8423 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8435 \begin_layout Enumerate
8439 \begin_layout Enumerate
8444 \begin_layout Enumerate
8448 \begin_layout Enumerate
8453 \begin_layout Enumerate
8457 \begin_layout Standard
8458 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8459 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8461 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8463 \begin_inset space ~
8467 \begin_inset space ~
8475 \begin_inset space ~
8479 \begin_inset space ~
8484 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8486 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8489 arg "depth-increment"
8495 arg "depth-decrement"
8509 arg "depth-increment"
8515 arg "depth-decrement"
8519 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8520 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8524 \begin_layout Standard
8525 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8526 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8527 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8528 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8529 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8532 \begin_layout Standard
8533 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8535 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8537 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8540 \begin_layout Subsection
8541 What You Can and Can't Nest
8544 \begin_layout Standard
8545 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8546 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8549 \begin_layout Standard
8550 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8551 than a simple yes or no.
8552 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8555 \begin_layout Itemize
8556 Completely unnestable
8559 \begin_layout Itemize
8560 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8564 \begin_layout Itemize
8565 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8569 \begin_layout Standard
8570 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8571 environments have them:
8574 \begin_layout Description
8575 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8576 Can't nest into them.
8580 \begin_layout Itemize
8586 \begin_layout Itemize
8592 \begin_layout Itemize
8598 \begin_layout Itemize
8604 \begin_layout Itemize
8611 \begin_layout Description
8613 \begin_inset space ~
8616 Nestable You can nest them.
8617 You can nest other things into them.
8621 \begin_layout Itemize
8627 \begin_layout Itemize
8633 \begin_layout Itemize
8639 \begin_layout Itemize
8645 \begin_layout Itemize
8651 \begin_layout Itemize
8657 \begin_layout Itemize
8663 \begin_layout Itemize
8670 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Itemize
8683 \begin_layout Description
8684 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8685 You can't nest anything into them.
8689 \begin_layout Itemize
8695 \begin_layout Itemize
8701 \begin_layout Itemize
8707 \begin_layout Itemize
8713 \begin_layout Itemize
8719 \begin_layout Itemize
8725 \begin_layout Itemize
8731 \begin_layout Itemize
8737 \begin_layout Itemize
8743 \begin_layout Itemize
8749 \begin_layout Itemize
8755 \begin_layout Itemize
8761 \begin_layout Itemize
8767 \begin_layout Itemize
8771 \begin_inset space ~
8777 \begin_layout Itemize
8784 \begin_layout Standard
8785 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8793 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8803 \begin_inset space ~
8806 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8807 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8808 nested section headings violate this.
8816 \begin_layout Subsection
8817 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8818 \begin_inset Index idx
8821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8822 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8830 \begin_layout Standard
8831 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8832 affected by nesting anyhow.
8836 \begin_layout Itemize
8840 \begin_layout Itemize
8844 \begin_layout Itemize
8848 \begin_layout Standard
8850 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8858 Figures and tables in
8862 are not affected by this.
8867 Have a look at section
8868 \begin_inset space ~
8872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8874 reference "sec:Floats"
8878 for more information about
8885 \begin_layout Standard
8887 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8888 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8892 \begin_layout Standard
8893 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8901 of its own, it behaves just like a
8902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8909 paragraph environment.
8910 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8914 \begin_layout Standard
8915 Here's an example with a table:
8918 \begin_layout Enumerate
8923 \begin_layout Enumerate
8924 This is (a) and it's nested.
8928 \begin_layout Standard
8929 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8935 \begin_layout Standard
8937 \begin_inset Tabular
8938 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8939 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8940 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8941 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9025 \begin_layout Standard
9026 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9033 \begin_layout Enumerate
9035 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9039 \begin_layout Enumerate
9043 \begin_layout Standard
9044 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9047 \begin_layout Enumerate
9052 \begin_layout Enumerate
9053 This is (a) and it's nested.
9057 \begin_layout Standard
9058 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9064 \begin_layout Standard
9066 \begin_inset Tabular
9067 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9068 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9069 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9070 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9154 \begin_layout Standard
9155 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9161 \begin_layout Enumerate
9168 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9171 \begin_layout Enumerate
9175 \begin_layout Standard
9176 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9180 \begin_layout Standard
9181 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9184 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9187 \begin_layout Enumerate
9192 \begin_layout Enumerate
9193 This is (a) and it's nested.
9196 \begin_layout Standard
9197 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9203 \begin_layout Standard
9205 \begin_inset Tabular
9206 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9207 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9208 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9209 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9294 \begin_layout Standard
9295 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9301 \begin_layout Enumerate
9303 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9310 \begin_layout Enumerate
9314 \begin_layout Standard
9315 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9321 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9322 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9326 \begin_layout Subsection
9327 Usage and General Features
9330 \begin_layout Standard
9331 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9332 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9341 is the innermost possible depth.
9342 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9345 \begin_layout Enumerate
9346 level #1 – outermost
9350 \begin_layout Enumerate
9355 \begin_layout Enumerate
9360 \begin_layout Enumerate
9365 \begin_layout Itemize
9370 \begin_layout Itemize
9379 \begin_layout Standard
9380 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9381 both of them in the example.
9382 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9392 For example, if we tried to nest another
9397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9404 , we would get errors.
9407 \begin_layout Subsection
9409 \begin_inset Index idx
9412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9421 \begin_layout Standard
9422 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9423 We have several examples of nested environments.
9424 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9428 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9429 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9432 \begin_layout Labeling
9433 \labelwidthstring MMM
9434 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9443 \begin_layout Labeling
9444 \labelwidthstring MMM
9445 #2-a This is level #2.
9446 We created it by using
9449 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9455 arg "depth-increment"
9462 \begin_layout Labeling
9463 \labelwidthstring MMM
9464 #3-a This is level #3.
9465 This time, we just enter
9472 arg "depth-increment"
9476 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9480 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9486 arg "depth-increment"
9493 \begin_layout Standard
9498 environment, nested inside of
9499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9507 So, it's at level #4.
9508 We did this by entering
9511 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9517 arg "depth-increment"
9520 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9525 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9541 \begin_layout Standard
9546 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9549 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9555 \begin_layout Labeling
9556 \labelwidthstring MMM
9557 #4-a This is level #4.
9561 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9564 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9569 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9573 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9578 keep nesting things inside
9579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9590 \begin_layout Labeling
9591 \labelwidthstring MMM
9592 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9597 \begin_layout Labeling
9598 \labelwidthstring MMM
9599 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9600 and this is level #6.
9601 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9605 \begin_layout Labeling
9606 \labelwidthstring MMM
9607 #5-b Back to level #5.
9611 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9617 arg "depth-decrement"
9624 \begin_layout Labeling
9625 \labelwidthstring MMM
9629 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9635 arg "depth-decrement"
9638 , we're back at level #4.
9642 \begin_layout Labeling
9643 \labelwidthstring MMM
9644 #3-b Back to level #3.
9645 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9649 \begin_layout Labeling
9650 \labelwidthstring MMM
9651 #2-b Back to level #2.
9656 \begin_layout Labeling
9657 \labelwidthstring MMM
9658 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9659 After this sentence, we will enter
9663 and change the paragraph environment back to
9670 \begin_layout Standard
9671 We could have also used the
9687 environment in place of the
9692 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9695 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9696 Example 2: Inheritance
9699 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9700 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9703 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9712 arg "depth-increment"
9716 \begin_inset Newline newline
9719 which, we will change to the
9727 \begin_layout Enumerate
9732 environment, at level #2.
9735 \begin_layout Enumerate
9736 Notice how the nested
9740 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9744 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9748 \begin_layout Standard
9749 We ended this example by entering
9754 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9758 and reset the nesting depth by using
9761 arg "depth-decrement"
9767 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9768 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9777 \begin_inset Argument 1
9780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9781 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9789 \begin_layout Enumerate
9790 This is level #1, in an
9794 paragraph environment.
9795 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9799 \begin_layout Enumerate
9804 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9810 arg "depth-increment"
9814 Now, what happens if we nest an
9818 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9819 label be? An asterisk?
9823 \begin_layout Itemize
9833 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9834 So, its label is a bullet.
9835 (We got here by using
9838 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9844 arg "depth-increment"
9847 , then changing the environment to
9855 \begin_layout Itemize
9856 Here's level #4, produced using
9859 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9865 arg "depth-increment"
9869 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9874 \begin_layout Enumerate
9877 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9882 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9886 , because we are in the
9894 environment (that is, it is an
9909 \begin_layout Enumerate
9914 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9915 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9919 \begin_layout Enumerate
9920 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9923 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9926 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9929 \begin_layout Enumerate
9933 arg "depth-decrement"
9936 to decrease the depth after the next
9939 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9946 \begin_layout Enumerate
9948 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9953 \begin_layout Enumerate
9955 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9956 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9960 \begin_layout Enumerate
9961 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9970 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9975 reset the counter for the label.
9979 \begin_layout Enumerate
9983 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9989 arg "depth-decrement"
9992 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9993 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9994 into the twofold-nested
10002 \begin_layout Enumerate
10003 The same thing happens if we do another
10006 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10012 arg "depth-decrement"
10015 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10018 \begin_layout Standard
10019 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10024 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10035 The number of other
10039 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10046 The same rule applies for the
10050 environment, as well.
10053 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10054 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10057 \begin_layout Enumerate
10058 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10059 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10060 the same detail with how we did it.
10069 \begin_layout Standard
10077 arg "depth-increment"
10084 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10085 the example in parentheses someplace.
10086 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10087 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10088 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10092 \begin_layout Enumerate
10097 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10101 \begin_layout Verse
10102 Now we will add verse.
10103 \begin_inset Newline newline
10106 It will get much worse.
10107 \begin_inset Newline newline
10117 arg "depth-increment"
10127 \begin_layout Verse
10128 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10129 \begin_inset Newline newline
10132 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10133 \begin_inset Newline newline
10139 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10147 \begin_layout Verse
10148 Here comes a table:
10152 \begin_layout Standard
10153 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10159 \begin_layout Standard
10161 \begin_inset Tabular
10162 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10163 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10164 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10165 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10250 \begin_layout Verse
10254 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10264 arg "depth-increment"
10270 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10276 \begin_inset Newline newline
10284 arg "depth-decrement"
10291 \begin_layout Enumerate
10296 : level #1) This is another item.
10297 Note that selecting a
10301 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10302 3 times to put the table inside the
10310 \begin_layout Quotation
10311 We're now ending the
10315 list and changing to
10320 We're still at level #1.
10321 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10322 The next set of paragraphs is a
10323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10330 We will nest both the
10337 \begin_inset space ~
10342 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10346 for the letter body.
10350 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10353 to preserve the depth.
10354 Remember that you need to use
10357 arg "newline-insert newline"
10360 to create multiple lines inside the
10367 \begin_inset space ~
10377 \begin_layout Right Address
10379 \begin_inset Newline newline
10382 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10383 \begin_inset Newline newline
10389 \begin_layout Address
10391 \begin_inset space ~
10397 \begin_layout Quotation
10398 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10402 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10403 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10404 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10405 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10406 as soon as possible.
10407 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10410 \begin_layout Quotation
10411 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10412 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10413 with your order, along with payment.
10416 \begin_layout Quotation
10417 We thank you again for your patience.
10420 \begin_layout Address
10422 \begin_inset Newline newline
10429 \begin_layout Quotation
10430 That ends that example!
10433 \begin_layout Standard
10434 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10435 gives you a lot of power with just
10437 We could have easily nested an
10458 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10461 \begin_layout Subsection
10463 \begin_inset Index idx
10466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10467 Nesting ! Separation
10473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10475 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10482 \begin_layout Standard
10483 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10485 For example you need two different enumerations:
10488 \begin_layout Enumerate
10493 \begin_layout Enumerate
10498 \begin_layout Enumerate
10502 \begin_layout Standard
10503 \begin_inset Separator plain
10509 \begin_layout Itemize
10515 \begin_layout Standard
10516 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10522 \begin_layout Enumerate
10526 \begin_layout Enumerate
10530 \begin_layout Enumerate
10534 \begin_layout Standard
10535 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10536 list item and use the menu
10538 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10539 Start New Environment
10542 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10543 ) and behind it the new list.
10546 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10547 Start New Parent Environment
10549 only appears if the item is nested.
10550 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10554 \begin_layout Standard
10555 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10556 (red arrow in LyX).
10557 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10558 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10561 \begin_layout Standard
10562 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10565 arg "paragraph-break"
10572 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10575 \begin_layout Section
10576 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10577 \begin_inset Index idx
10580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10589 \begin_layout Standard
10590 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10591 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10593 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10594 be broken at the end of a line.
10595 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10599 \begin_layout Subsection
10601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10603 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10608 \begin_inset Index idx
10611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10620 \begin_layout Standard
10621 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10622 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10623 ) not to break the line at
10625 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10628 \begin_layout Quote
10629 Further documentation is given in section
10630 \begin_inset Newline newline
10634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10636 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10644 \begin_layout Standard
10645 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10660 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10669 A protected space is set with
10671 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10672 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10674 \begin_inset space ~
10682 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10688 \begin_layout Subsection
10690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10692 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10697 \begin_inset Index idx
10700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10701 Spacing ! Horizontal
10709 \begin_layout Standard
10710 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10712 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10713 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10717 The length units are listed in Appendix
10718 \begin_inset space ~
10722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10724 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10731 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10735 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10740 \begin_inset Index idx
10743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10744 Spaces ! Inter-word
10752 \begin_layout Standard
10753 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10754 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10755 at the ends of sentences.
10756 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10757 automatically takes care about this.
10758 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10759 followed by a period; see section
10760 \begin_inset space ~
10764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10766 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10771 To insert a normal space, select
10773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10774 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10776 \begin_inset space ~
10784 arg "space-insert normal"
10790 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10792 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10794 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10799 \begin_inset Index idx
10802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10811 \begin_layout Standard
10813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10820 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10829 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10830 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10831 inside abbreviations:
10834 \begin_layout Quote
10836 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10840 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10843 \begin_layout Standard
10844 or between values and units.
10845 Compare for example this:
10846 \begin_inset Newline newline
10850 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10854 \begin_inset Newline newline
10857 10 kg (normal space
10860 \begin_layout Standard
10861 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10863 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10864 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10866 \begin_inset space ~
10874 arg "space-insert thin"
10880 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10884 \begin_layout Standard
10885 You can also insert the following space types:
10888 \begin_layout Description
10890 \begin_inset space ~
10894 \begin_inset space ~
10897 space A line with a
10898 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10902 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10906 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10909 negative thin space between the arrows.
10912 \begin_layout Description
10914 \begin_inset space ~
10918 \begin_inset space ~
10921 space A line with a
10922 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10926 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10930 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10933 negative medium space between the arrows.
10936 \begin_layout Description
10938 \begin_inset space ~
10942 \begin_inset space ~
10945 space A line with a
10946 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10950 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10954 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10957 negative thick space between the arrows.
10960 \begin_layout Description
10962 \begin_inset space ~
10966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10970 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10974 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10978 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10982 \begin_inset space ~
10986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10989 em) space between the arrows.
10992 \begin_layout Description
10994 \begin_inset space ~
10998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11002 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11006 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11010 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11014 \begin_inset space ~
11018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11021 em) space between the arrows.
11024 \begin_layout Description
11026 \begin_inset space ~
11030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11034 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11038 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11042 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11046 \begin_inset space ~
11050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11053 em) space between the arrows.
11056 \begin_layout Description
11058 \begin_inset space ~
11062 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11066 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11071 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11075 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11078 cm space between the arrows.
11081 \begin_layout Standard
11083 \begin_inset space ~
11087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11089 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11093 lists the different space sizes.
11096 \begin_layout Standard
11097 \begin_inset Float table
11102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11103 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11106 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11108 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11112 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11122 \begin_inset Tabular
11123 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11124 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11125 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11126 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11242 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11322 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11365 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11378 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11399 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11401 \begin_inset Index idx
11404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11413 \begin_layout Standard
11414 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11415 feature for adding extra space
11416 in a uniform fashion.
11417 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11418 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11419 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11420 equally between themselves.
11423 \begin_layout Standard
11424 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11427 \begin_layout Quote
11429 This is on the left side
11430 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11433 This is on the right
11436 \begin_layout Quote
11439 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11443 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11449 \begin_layout Quote
11452 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11456 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11460 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11466 \begin_layout Standard
11467 That was an example in the
11473 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11477 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11481 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11484 is one in a standard paragraph.
11485 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11489 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11492 \begin_layout Standard
11493 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11496 \begin_inset space ~
11501 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11504 \begin_layout Standard
11506 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11510 \begin_inset space ~
11516 \begin_layout Standard
11518 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11522 \begin_inset space ~
11528 \begin_layout Standard
11530 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11534 \begin_inset space ~
11540 \begin_layout Standard
11542 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11546 \begin_inset space ~
11552 \begin_layout Standard
11554 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11558 \begin_inset space ~
11564 \begin_layout Standard
11566 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11570 \begin_inset space ~
11576 \begin_layout Standard
11577 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11585 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11589 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11591 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11592 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11596 option in the space dialog.
11604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11608 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11613 \begin_inset Index idx
11616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11625 \begin_layout Standard
11626 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11627 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11630 \begin_layout Standard
11631 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11634 What is correct English?:
11635 \begin_inset Newline newline
11639 \begin_inset Newline newline
11643 \begin_inset space ~
11646 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11647 \begin_inset Newline newline
11651 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11662 \begin_inset Newline newline
11666 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11677 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11683 \begin_layout Standard
11685 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11690 \begin_inset space ~
11694 \begin_inset space ~
11698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11702 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11704 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11705 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11709 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11715 \begin_inset space ~
11719 \begin_inset space ~
11723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11726 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11735 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11736 That is why it is named
11737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11745 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11746 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11750 \begin_layout Subsection
11752 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11754 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11759 \begin_inset Index idx
11762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11771 \begin_layout Standard
11772 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11774 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11775 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11777 \begin_inset space ~
11783 There you find the following sizes:
11786 \begin_layout Standard
11799 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11800 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11805 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11807 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11808 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11810 \begin_inset space ~
11816 \begin_inset Index idx
11819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11820 Document ! Settings
11825 for the paragraph separation.
11826 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11837 \begin_layout Standard
11843 \begin_inset Index idx
11846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11852 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11853 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11858 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11859 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11868 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11877 s are described in section
11878 \begin_inset space ~
11882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11884 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11893 If there are several
11897 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11898 You can therefore use
11902 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11905 \begin_layout Standard
11910 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11911 \begin_inset space ~
11915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11917 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11924 \begin_layout Standard
11925 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11935 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11936 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11948 \begin_layout Subsection
11949 Paragraph Alignment
11950 \begin_inset Index idx
11953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11954 Paragraph ! Alignment
11962 \begin_layout Standard
11963 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11965 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11968 dialog (toolbar button
11971 arg "layout-paragraph"
11975 There are five possibilities:
11978 \begin_layout Itemize
11986 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11992 \begin_layout Itemize
12000 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12006 \begin_layout Itemize
12014 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12020 \begin_layout Itemize
12028 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12034 \begin_layout Itemize
12042 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12048 \begin_layout Standard
12049 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12050 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12051 the left and right margins.
12052 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12055 \begin_layout Standard
12057 This paragraph is right aligned,
12060 \begin_layout Standard
12062 this one is centered,
12065 \begin_layout Standard
12067 this one is left aligned.
12070 \begin_layout Subsection
12072 \begin_inset Index idx
12075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12076 Page breaks ! Forced
12082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12084 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12091 \begin_layout Standard
12092 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12093 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12094 force a page break where you want one.
12095 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12096 is good at page breaking.
12097 Only if you use a lot of
12101 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12102 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12105 \begin_layout Standard
12106 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12107 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12111 have to change the page breaking.
12114 \begin_layout Standard
12115 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12117 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12119 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12120 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12122 \begin_inset space ~
12128 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12130 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12131 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12133 \begin_inset space ~
12138 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12140 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12141 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12144 \begin_layout Standard
12145 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12146 at the top of a page.
12147 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12149 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12150 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12151 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12155 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12159 to learn more about
12166 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12170 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12175 \begin_inset Index idx
12178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12179 Page breaks ! Clear
12187 \begin_layout Standard
12188 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12189 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12190 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12191 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12192 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12195 \begin_layout Standard
12196 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12198 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12199 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12201 \begin_inset space ~
12207 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12209 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12210 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12212 \begin_inset space ~
12216 \begin_inset space ~
12221 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12222 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12225 \begin_layout Subsection
12227 \begin_inset Index idx
12230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12239 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12246 \begin_layout Standard
12247 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12249 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12251 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12252 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12254 \begin_inset space ~
12258 \begin_inset space ~
12266 arg "newline-insert newline"
12270 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12272 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12273 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12275 \begin_inset space ~
12279 \begin_inset space ~
12287 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12290 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12292 This is useful to avoid
12293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12300 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12303 \begin_layout Standard
12304 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12305 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12307 very good at line breaking.
12308 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12309 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12310 \begin_inset space ~
12314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12316 reference "sec:Quote"
12321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12323 reference "sec:Verse"
12328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12330 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12337 \begin_layout Subsection
12339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12341 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12346 \begin_inset Index idx
12349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12358 \begin_layout Standard
12360 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12371 \begin_layout Standard
12375 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12376 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12378 \begin_inset space ~
12383 you can insert horizontal lines.
12384 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12385 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12386 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12389 \begin_layout Standard
12391 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12402 \begin_layout Section
12403 Characters and Symbols
12406 \begin_layout Standard
12407 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12408 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12409 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12417 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12421 for information on how this is done.
12424 \begin_layout Standard
12425 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12430 dialog via the menu
12432 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12433 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12439 \begin_layout Standard
12440 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12448 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12449 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12451 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12459 \begin_layout Section
12460 Fonts and Text Styles
12461 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12463 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12470 \begin_layout Subsection
12472 \begin_inset Index idx
12475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12484 \begin_layout Standard
12485 There are two types of fonts:
12488 \begin_layout Description
12490 \begin_inset space ~
12494 \begin_inset Index idx
12497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12503 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12508 characters) in the font.
12509 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12510 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12511 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12512 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12513 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12514 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12515 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12516 \begin_inset Newline newline
12519 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12520 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12521 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12522 sizes than at small ones.
12523 \begin_inset Newline newline
12537 \begin_inset space ~
12545 \begin_layout Description
12547 \begin_inset space ~
12551 \begin_inset Index idx
12554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12560 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12561 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12562 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12563 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12564 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12565 image manipulation program.
12566 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12567 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12568 \begin_inset space ~
12571 pixels high up to 34
12572 \begin_inset space ~
12575 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12576 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12577 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12579 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12580 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12581 \begin_inset Newline newline
12584 Bitmap fonts are named
12587 \begin_inset space ~
12592 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12595 \begin_layout Standard
12596 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12597 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12598 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12599 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12600 use scalable fonts.
12603 \begin_layout Standard
12604 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12607 \begin_layout Standard
12608 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12609 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12610 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12611 font to emphasize text, you use an
12612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12620 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12622 In \SpecialChar LyX
12623 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12627 \begin_layout Subsection
12630 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12632 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12639 \begin_layout Standard
12640 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12641 used its own fonts.
12642 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12643 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12646 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12647 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12648 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12649 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12650 to a word processor.
12651 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12652 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12653 files are very portable across
12654 different machines.
12655 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12656 has increased a lot
12657 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12660 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12662 \begin_inset space ~
12666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12668 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12673 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12674 code in the document
12675 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12678 \begin_layout Standard
12679 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12680 engines that are also able directly
12681 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12683 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12685 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12687 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12688 that is installed on your system.
12689 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12692 \begin_layout Standard
12693 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12701 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12702 es; so you might have to experiment.
12710 \begin_layout Subsection
12711 Document Font and Font size
12712 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12714 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12719 \begin_inset Index idx
12722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12729 \begin_inset Index idx
12732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12741 \begin_layout Standard
12742 You can set the document fonts in the
12744 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12748 \begin_inset Index idx
12751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12752 Document ! Settings
12762 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12763 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12766 \begin_inset space ~
12775 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12777 \begin_inset space ~
12780 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12783 \begin_layout Standard
12788 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12789 This requires that you use
12801 as the output format, i.
12802 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12806 \begin_inset space \space{}
12809 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12810 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12811 installed (see section
12812 \begin_inset space ~
12816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12818 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12823 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12825 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12826 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12828 \begin_inset space ~
12831 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12832 cannot determine the family.
12833 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12834 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12837 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12840 \begin_layout Standard
12841 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12842 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12847 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12853 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12854 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12862 \begin_inset space ~
12868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12881 European Computer Modern
12884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12891 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12894 \begin_layout Standard
12903 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12904 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12909 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12912 \begin_inset space ~
12917 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12923 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12924 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12927 \begin_layout Itemize
12931 \begin_inset space ~
12936 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12949 \begin_inset space ~
12954 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12955 community in order to replace
12959 as the default font.
12960 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12961 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12964 \begin_inset space ~
12977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12978 One difference is improved kerning.
12986 \begin_layout Itemize
12990 \begin_inset space ~
12994 \begin_inset space ~
12999 fonts in (the rare) case that
13002 \begin_inset space ~
13007 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13022 Virtual means that it
13023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13034 -glyphs from other fonts.
13035 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13057 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13063 \begin_inset Index idx
13066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13068 -packages ! aeguill
13073 with the document preamble line
13074 \begin_inset Newline newline
13081 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13082 \begin_inset Newline newline
13087 will fix the guillemet problem.
13092 and that accented characters are not
13096 glyph, but built of
13100 characters, the accent and the letter.
13101 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13107 If you search for example for the French word
13108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13115 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13124 and not for the glyph
13125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13129 \begin_inset space ~
13133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13139 \begin_layout Itemize
13140 If you do not like the look of
13148 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13153 \begin_inset space ~
13159 \begin_inset space ~
13169 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13170 \begin_inset space ~
13173 serif and typewriter fonts,
13177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13178 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13185 \begin_inset space ~
13194 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13199 \begin_inset space \space{}
13207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13211 \begin_inset space \space{}
13217 \begin_inset space ~
13225 \begin_inset space ~
13235 but you can also select your own.
13236 \begin_inset Newline newline
13239 The differences between roman,
13242 \begin_inset space ~
13251 fonts are explained in section
13252 \begin_inset space ~
13256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13258 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13263 \begin_inset Newline newline
13269 \begin_inset space ~
13274 was originally designed for newspapers.
13275 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13276 into the small newspaper columns.
13280 \begin_inset space ~
13285 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13288 \begin_layout Standard
13289 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13302 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13307 depends on the class you are using.
13308 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13311 \begin_layout Standard
13312 Note that the font size is the
13317 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13318 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13319 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13320 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13323 \begin_inset space ~
13329 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13330 \begin_inset space ~
13334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13336 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13343 \begin_layout Standard
13347 \begin_inset space ~
13352 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13354 \begin_inset space ~
13357 serif or typewriter.
13362 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13372 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13375 \begin_layout Standard
13380 LaTeX font encoding
13382 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13383 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13389 \begin_inset Index idx
13392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13394 -packages ! fontenc
13400 \begin_inset space ~
13404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13406 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13411 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13412 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13419 \begin_layout Standard
13420 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13422 Use Old Style Figures
13426 Use True Small Caps
13429 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13432 Use Old Style Figures
13434 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13436 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13444 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13448 Use True Small Caps
13450 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13451 of scaled capitals.
13452 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13453 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13456 \begin_layout Standard
13461 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13462 a font to display the script characters.
13466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13467 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13473 \begin_inset Index idx
13476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13483 So this has no effect for the document language
13497 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13501 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13509 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13514 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13515 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13517 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13519 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13522 dialog, see section
13523 \begin_inset space ~
13527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13529 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13541 \begin_layout Subsection
13545 \begin_layout Standard
13546 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13547 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13549 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13550 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13551 choose a math font in the dialog
13553 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13557 \begin_inset Index idx
13560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13561 Document ! Settings
13567 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13568 automatically selects a math font.
13569 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13570 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13579 \begin_inset space ~
13585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13590 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13591 document font is available.
13594 \begin_layout Standard
13595 Note that the math font will not be used for
13599 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13605 or by the insertion of the command
13612 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13613 \begin_inset space ~
13617 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13618 while the math characters do not.
13620 \begin_inset space ~
13623 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13626 \begin_inset space ~
13634 \begin_inset space ~
13639 in the document font settings.
13642 \begin_layout Standard
13643 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13644 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13645 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13646 font (in most cases
13647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13653 \begin_inset space ~
13659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13662 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13663 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13671 \begin_inset space ~
13677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13683 \begin_layout Subsection
13684 Using Different Character Styles
13685 \begin_inset Index idx
13688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13695 \begin_inset Index idx
13698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13707 \begin_layout Standard
13708 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13709 automatically changes the character style for certain
13710 paragraph environments.
13712 supports two character styles,
13721 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13725 \begin_layout Standard
13730 style, do one of the following:
13733 \begin_layout Itemize
13734 click on the toolbar button
13743 \begin_layout Itemize
13744 use the key binding
13753 \begin_layout Standard
13754 These commands are all toggles.
13759 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13762 \begin_layout Standard
13763 One typically uses the
13767 style for proper names.
13769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13776 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13784 \begin_layout Standard
13785 A more widely used character style is the
13790 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13797 \begin_layout Itemize
13798 clicking on the toolbar button
13807 \begin_layout Itemize
13808 using the keybindings
13817 \begin_layout Standard
13822 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13824 use a different font.
13827 \begin_layout Standard
13828 We've been using the
13832 style all over the place in this document.
13833 Here's one more example:
13836 \begin_layout Quotation
13839 Do not overuse character styles!
13842 \begin_layout Standard
13843 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13844 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13845 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13846 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13850 \begin_layout Standard
13851 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13859 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13861 \begin_inset space ~
13864 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13870 arg "dialog-show character"
13876 \begin_layout Subsection
13877 Fine-Tuning with the
13882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13884 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13889 \begin_inset Index idx
13892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13901 \begin_layout Standard
13902 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13904 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13905 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13906 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13907 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13908 from ordinary dialog.
13911 \begin_layout Standard
13912 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13913 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13914 \begin_inset Newline newline
13917 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13918 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13921 \begin_layout Standard
13922 To use custom character styles, open the
13924 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13926 \begin_inset space ~
13929 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13932 dialog or press the toolbar button
13935 arg "dialog-show character"
13939 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13940 font property that you can choose.
13941 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13944 \begin_inset space ~
13949 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13954 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13955 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13956 environments all at once.
13959 \begin_layout Standard
13960 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13963 \begin_inset space ~
13975 \begin_layout Labeling
13976 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13990 The possible options are:
13994 \begin_layout Labeling
13995 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14000 This is the Roman font family.
14001 Normally a serif font.
14002 It's also the default family.
14012 \begin_layout Labeling
14013 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14017 \begin_inset space ~
14024 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14036 \begin_layout Labeling
14037 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14044 This is the Typewriter font family.
14050 arg "font-typewriter"
14059 \begin_layout Labeling
14060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14065 This corresponds to the print weight.
14070 \begin_layout Labeling
14071 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14076 This is the Medium font series.
14077 It's also the default series.
14080 \begin_layout Labeling
14081 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14088 This is the Bold font series.
14101 \begin_layout Labeling
14102 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14107 As the name implies.
14112 \begin_layout Labeling
14113 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14118 This is the Upright font shape.
14119 It's also the default shape.
14122 \begin_layout Labeling
14123 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14137 s the Italic font shape
14143 \begin_layout Labeling
14144 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14151 This is the Slanted font shape
14153 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14154 , this is different from italic).
14157 \begin_layout Labeling
14158 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14162 \begin_inset space ~
14169 This is the Small caps font shape
14176 \begin_layout Labeling
14177 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14182 Alters the text color.
14183 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14187 \begin_inset space ~
14192 , which means that the document default color set in
14194 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14195 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14201 \begin_inset space ~
14206 is used, you can choose between
14283 \begin_inset Index idx
14286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14295 \begin_layout Labeling
14296 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14301 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14302 the language of the document.
14303 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14304 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14306 \begin_inset Newline newline
14309 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14311 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14312 When using the spell checking (see section
14313 \begin_inset space ~
14317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14319 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14323 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14326 \begin_layout Labeling
14327 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14332 Alters the size of the font.
14333 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14334 proportional to the document font size.
14335 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14336 the details, but a general description of what
14342 \begin_layout Labeling
14343 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14364 arg "font-size tiny"
14370 \begin_layout Labeling
14371 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14392 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14398 \begin_layout Labeling
14399 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14420 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14426 \begin_layout Labeling
14427 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14448 arg "font-size small"
14454 \begin_layout Labeling
14455 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14469 It's also the default size.
14473 arg "font-size normal"
14479 \begin_layout Labeling
14480 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14501 arg "font-size large"
14507 \begin_layout Labeling
14508 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14529 arg "font-size larger"
14535 \begin_layout Labeling
14536 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14557 arg "font-size largest"
14563 \begin_layout Labeling
14564 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14585 arg "font-size huge"
14591 \begin_layout Labeling
14592 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14613 arg "font-size giant"
14619 \begin_layout Labeling
14620 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14625 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14645 arg "font-size increase"
14651 \begin_layout Labeling
14652 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14657 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14677 arg "font-size decrease"
14684 \begin_layout Standard
14689 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14690 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14692 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14693 — use those instead.
14694 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14697 \begin_layout Labeling
14698 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14703 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14708 \begin_layout Labeling
14709 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14716 This is text with emphasize on
14719 This might seem like the same as
14723 , but it is actually a bit different.
14729 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14731 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14734 \begin_layout Labeling
14735 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14742 This is text with Underbar on.
14748 arg "font-underline"
14754 \begin_inset Newline newline
14759 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14760 when you could not change fonts.
14761 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14762 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14763 because some people
14767 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14770 \begin_layout Labeling
14771 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14775 \begin_inset space ~
14782 This is text with Double underbar on.
14788 arg "font-underunderline"
14792 \begin_inset Newline newline
14795 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14796 about double underbar.
14799 \begin_layout Labeling
14800 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14804 \begin_inset space ~
14811 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14817 arg "font-underwave"
14821 \begin_inset Newline newline
14824 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14825 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14828 \begin_layout Labeling
14829 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14836 This is text with Strikeout on.
14842 arg "font-strikeout"
14846 \begin_inset Newline newline
14849 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14850 changed in the meantime.
14853 \begin_layout Labeling
14854 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14861 This is text with Noun on.
14868 , this is a logical attribute.
14869 Normally it's equivalent to
14872 \begin_inset space ~
14881 \begin_layout Standard
14882 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14883 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14885 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14887 \begin_inset space ~
14890 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14896 arg "dialog-show character"
14899 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14900 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14903 arg "textstyle-apply"
14907 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14911 \begin_layout Standard
14912 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14919 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14920 (suppose you just set the shape to
14921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14939 \begin_inset space ~
14951 \begin_layout Standard
14952 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14960 \begin_inset space ~
14972 \begin_layout Itemize
14978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14985 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15003 \begin_inset Newline newline
15007 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15021 \begin_inset Note Note
15024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15025 For more on phantoms see section
15026 \begin_inset space ~
15030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15032 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15042 \begin_inset Newline newline
15048 \begin_layout Itemize
15053 fonts use characters with serifs.
15054 These are the small
15055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15062 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15063 The following example shows the difference:
15064 \begin_inset Newline newline
15068 \begin_inset Newline newline
15073 text without serifs
15076 \begin_inset Newline newline
15079 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15080 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15087 \begin_layout Itemize
15092 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15093 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15094 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15097 \begin_layout Standard
15098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15105 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15106 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15109 \begin_inset space ~
15114 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15115 the property to be removed.
15116 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15117 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15118 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15136 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15137 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15145 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15149 \begin_inset space ~
15154 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15165 If you, for example, set
15166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15184 \begin_inset space ~
15189 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15198 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15201 \begin_layout Standard
15202 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15203 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15206 \begin_layout Section
15207 Printing and Previewing
15210 \begin_layout Subsection
15214 \begin_layout Standard
15215 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15216 using \SpecialChar LyX
15217 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15218 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15219 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15220 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15222 Additional Features
15227 \begin_layout Standard
15229 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15232 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15233 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15234 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15237 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15238 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15239 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15240 to turn your writing into printable output.
15241 This happens in two stages:
15244 \begin_layout Enumerate
15245 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15246 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15248 a file with the extension,
15249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15263 \begin_layout Enumerate
15264 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15265 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15266 to use the commands in the
15270 file to produce printable output.
15273 \begin_layout Subsection
15274 Output file formats
15275 \begin_inset Index idx
15278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15287 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15294 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15295 Simple text (ASCII)
15296 \begin_inset Index idx
15299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15300 File formats ! ASCII
15308 \begin_layout Standard
15309 This file type has the extension
15310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15322 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15326 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15333 \begin_layout Standard
15334 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15336 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15337 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15339 \begin_inset space ~
15345 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15346 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15347 bibliography (section
15348 \begin_inset space ~
15352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15354 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15359 If your document includes such material, use
15361 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15362 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15364 \begin_inset space ~
15368 \begin_inset space ~
15372 \begin_inset space ~
15380 \begin_inset space ~
15384 \begin_inset space ~
15390 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15391 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15394 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15397 \begin_inset Index idx
15400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15401 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15410 \begin_layout Standard
15411 This file type has the extension
15412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15423 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15426 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15427 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15428 -Errors or to process it manually
15429 with console commands.
15430 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15431 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15432 's temporary directory whenever you
15433 view or export your document.
15436 \begin_layout Standard
15437 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15438 -file using the menu
15440 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15441 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15445 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15446 export variants are explained in section
15447 \begin_inset space ~
15451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15453 reference "subsec:Export"
15460 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15462 \begin_inset Index idx
15465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15474 \begin_layout Standard
15475 This file type has the extension
15476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15496 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15497 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15498 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15502 \begin_layout Standard
15503 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15504 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15505 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15506 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15507 when you view the DVI.
15508 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15511 \begin_layout Standard
15512 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15514 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15515 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15520 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15521 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15523 \begin_inset space ~
15529 The latter option uses the program
15531 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15537 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15540 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15541 font access (see section
15542 \begin_inset space ~
15546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15548 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15553 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15554 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15559 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15561 \begin_inset Index idx
15564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15565 File formats ! PostScript
15573 \begin_layout Standard
15574 This file type has the extension
15575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15587 PostScript was developed by the company
15591 as a printer language.
15592 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15594 PostScript can be seen as a
15595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15598 programming language
15599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15602 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15607 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15614 \begin_inset Index idx
15617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15619 -packages ! pstricks
15629 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15632 \begin_layout Standard
15633 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15637 Encapsulated PostScript
15638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15641 (EPS, file extension
15642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15654 As \SpecialChar LyX
15655 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15656 convert them in the background to EPS.
15657 If, for example, you have 50
15658 \begin_inset space ~
15661 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15663 \begin_inset space ~
15666 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15667 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15669 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15670 EPS to avoid this problem.
15673 \begin_layout Standard
15674 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15676 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15677 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15683 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15685 \begin_inset Index idx
15688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15695 \begin_inset Index idx
15698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15707 \begin_layout Standard
15708 This file type has the extension
15709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15725 Portable Document Format
15726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15733 was derived from PostScript.
15734 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15743 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15744 looks exactly the same.
15747 \begin_layout Standard
15748 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15752 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15756 (JPG, file extension
15757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15784 Portable Network Graphics
15785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15788 (PNG, file extension
15789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15801 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15802 converts them in the
15803 background to one of these formats.
15804 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15805 will slow down your workflow.
15806 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15809 \begin_layout Standard
15810 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15812 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15818 \begin_layout Description
15820 \begin_inset space ~
15823 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15827 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15830 \begin_layout Description
15832 \begin_inset space ~
15839 ) This uses the program
15841 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15844 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15847 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15850 is a new engine, derived from
15854 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15855 access (see section
15856 \begin_inset space ~
15860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15862 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15867 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15868 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15873 \begin_layout Description
15875 \begin_inset space ~
15882 ) This uses the program
15887 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15893 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15894 font access (see section
15895 \begin_inset space ~
15899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15901 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15906 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15907 vertically written Japanese.
15910 \begin_layout Description
15912 \begin_inset space ~
15915 (cropped) This is the same as
15918 \begin_inset space ~
15923 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15924 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15925 to generate good-looking
15926 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15929 \begin_layout Description
15931 \begin_inset space ~
15934 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15938 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15942 \begin_layout Description
15944 \begin_inset space ~
15947 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15951 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15952 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15956 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15957 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15960 \begin_layout Standard
15964 \begin_inset space ~
15973 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15974 works without problems.
15975 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15976 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15980 \begin_inset space ~
15988 \begin_inset space ~
15993 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
16001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16003 \begin_inset Index idx
16006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16007 FileFormats ! XHTML
16013 \begin_inset Index idx
16016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16025 \begin_layout Standard
16026 This file type has the extension
16027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16039 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16040 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16041 When \SpecialChar LyX
16042 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16043 suitable for the purpose.
16044 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16046 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16047 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16050 between different formats, which are described in section
16052 Math Output in XHTML
16057 \begin_inset space ~
16065 \begin_layout Standard
16066 XHTML output remains
16067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16074 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16075 features are supported yet.
16079 and the World Wide Web
16083 Additional Features
16085 manual, for more information.
16088 \begin_layout Standard
16089 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16091 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16092 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16098 \begin_layout Subsection
16100 \begin_inset Index idx
16103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16112 \begin_layout Standard
16113 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16114 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16123 or use the toolbar button
16130 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16131 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16132 \begin_inset space ~
16136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16138 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16142 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16144 \begin_inset space ~
16148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16150 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16155 Further output formats can be selected via
16157 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16158 View (Other Formats)
16160 or the toolbar button
16169 \begin_layout Standard
16170 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16171 viewer window using the menu
16173 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16178 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16179 Update (Other Formats)
16184 \begin_layout Standard
16185 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16188 To have a real output, export your document.
16191 \begin_layout Section
16192 A few Words about Typography
16193 \begin_inset Index idx
16196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16205 \begin_layout Subsection
16206 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16207 \begin_inset Index idx
16210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16217 \begin_inset Index idx
16220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16229 \begin_layout Standard
16230 In \SpecialChar LyX
16232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16243 character comes in four lengths: the
16255 , and the minus sign:
16256 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16262 \begin_layout Standard
16263 \begin_inset Tabular
16264 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16265 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16266 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16267 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16268 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16269 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16298 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16338 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16363 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16365 \begin_inset space ~
16368 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16375 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16400 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16402 \begin_inset space ~
16405 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16426 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16460 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16466 \begin_layout Standard
16467 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16479 character multiple times in a row.
16480 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16481 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16514 \begin_layout Standard
16515 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16516 math mode and has a length of its own.
16517 Here are some examples:
16520 \begin_layout Enumerate
16521 line- and page-breaks
16522 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16532 \begin_layout Enumerate
16534 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16544 \begin_layout Enumerate
16545 Oh — there's a dash.
16546 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16556 \begin_layout Enumerate
16557 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16561 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16571 \begin_layout Subsection
16573 \begin_inset Index idx
16576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16583 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16585 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16592 \begin_layout Standard
16593 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16594 but automatically in the output.
16595 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16601 \begin_inset Index idx
16604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16611 following the rules of the document language.
16614 \begin_layout Standard
16616 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16620 font and with unusual constructs, like
16621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16629 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16630 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16631 This is done with the menu
16633 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16634 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16636 \begin_inset space ~
16642 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16644 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16648 \begin_layout Standard
16649 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16650 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16661 would then see the hyphen
16662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16669 as a hyphenation possibility.
16670 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16671 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16672 as described in section
16674 Prevent Hyphenation
16679 \begin_inset space ~
16687 \begin_layout Subsection
16689 \begin_inset Index idx
16692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16701 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16702 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16703 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16705 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16712 \begin_layout Standard
16713 When \SpecialChar LyX
16714 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16715 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16717 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16723 appropriate amount of space.
16724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16727 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16729 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16730 gets after another word.
16733 \begin_layout Standard
16734 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16735 not work in all cases.
16737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16748 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16749 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16752 \begin_layout Standard
16753 Here are some examples of
16757 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16760 \begin_layout Itemize
16765 \begin_layout Itemize
16770 \begin_layout Standard
16771 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16774 \begin_layout Itemize
16776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16780 this is too much space!
16783 \begin_layout Itemize
16788 \begin_layout Standard
16789 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16792 \begin_layout Standard
16793 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16796 \begin_layout Enumerate
16800 \begin_inset space ~
16805 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16806 \begin_inset space ~
16810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16812 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16817 \begin_inset Index idx
16820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16821 Spaces ! inter-word
16829 \begin_layout Enumerate
16833 \begin_inset space ~
16838 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16839 \begin_inset space ~
16843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16845 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16850 \begin_inset Index idx
16853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16862 \begin_layout Enumerate
16866 \begin_inset space ~
16870 \begin_inset space ~
16874 \begin_inset space ~
16881 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16883 \begin_inset space ~
16888 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16889 This function is also bound to
16892 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16898 \begin_layout Standard
16899 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16902 \begin_layout Itemize
16904 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16908 \begin_inset space \space{}
16911 this is too much space!
16914 \begin_layout Itemize
16915 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16919 \begin_layout Standard
16920 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16921 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16923 will take care of this.
16926 \begin_layout Standard
16927 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16931 \begin_inset space ~
16937 feature described in the section
16939 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16944 Additional Features
16949 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16951 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667523
16953 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669265
16957 \begin_inset Index idx
16960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16962 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669122
16964 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669123
16973 \begin_inset Index idx
16976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16978 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669129
16980 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669204
16987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17013 \begin_layout Standard
17016 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666231
17018 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666233
17022 Specifically, it will
17023 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667043
17025 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667044
17029 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666244
17031 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666245
17034 at the beginning of quoted text, and use a closing
17035 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666248
17037 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666249
17042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17050 The keyboard character,
17054 , generates this automatically.
17057 \begin_layout Standard
17058 You can specify what character the
17063 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669340
17067 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667059
17076 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17080 \begin_inset Index idx
17083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17084 Document ! Settings
17090 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667133
17092 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669342
17098 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667108
17101 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17102 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language)
17106 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666221
17108 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756786
17114 \begin_layout Labeling
17115 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17118 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17129 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666647
17131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17139 \begin_inset space ~
17143 \begin_inset space ~
17147 \begin_inset Quotes els
17151 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17159 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17161 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665592
17165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17169 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665595
17171 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17175 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665605
17179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17183 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665637
17185 \begin_inset Quotes els
17189 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17192 quotation marks (as common, e.
17193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17201 \begin_layout Labeling
17202 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17204 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17207 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17211 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17215 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666671
17217 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17221 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17225 \begin_inset space ~
17229 \begin_inset space ~
17233 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17237 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17245 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17246 Use quotes like ”this”
17247 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665692
17249 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17253 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17257 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17261 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17264 quotation marks (as common, e.
17265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17273 \begin_layout Labeling
17274 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17276 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17279 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17283 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17287 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666696
17289 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17293 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17297 \begin_inset space ~
17301 \begin_inset space ~
17305 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17309 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17317 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17319 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17323 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17327 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665749
17329 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17333 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17337 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17341 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17344 quotation marks (as common, e.
17345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17353 \begin_layout Labeling
17354 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17356 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17359 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17363 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17367 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666716
17369 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17373 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17377 \begin_inset space ~
17381 \begin_inset space ~
17385 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17389 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17397 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17399 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17403 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17407 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665786
17409 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17413 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17417 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17421 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17424 quotation marks (as common, e.
17425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17433 \begin_layout Labeling
17434 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17436 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17439 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17443 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17447 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666730
17449 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17453 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17457 \begin_inset space ~
17461 \begin_inset space ~
17465 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17469 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17477 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17479 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17483 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17487 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665816
17489 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17493 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17497 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17501 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17504 quotation marks (as common, e.
17505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17508 g., in Switzerland)
17513 \begin_layout Labeling
17514 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17516 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17519 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17523 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17527 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666747
17529 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17533 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17537 \begin_inset space ~
17541 \begin_inset space ~
17545 \begin_inset Quotes als
17549 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17557 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17559 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17563 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17567 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665851
17569 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17573 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17577 \begin_inset Quotes als
17581 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17584 quotation marks (as common, e.
17585 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17591 \begin_layout Labeling
17592 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17594 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666768
17597 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17601 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17605 \begin_inset space ~
17609 \begin_inset space ~
17613 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17617 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17623 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17627 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17631 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17635 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17638 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17641 \begin_layout Labeling
17642 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17644 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666784
17647 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17651 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17655 \begin_inset space ~
17659 \begin_inset space ~
17663 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17667 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17673 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17677 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17681 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17685 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17688 quotation marks (as common, e.
17689 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17692 g., in Great Britain)
17695 \begin_layout Labeling
17696 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17698 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666803
17701 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17705 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17709 \begin_inset space ~
17713 \begin_inset space ~
17717 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17721 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17727 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17731 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17735 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17739 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17742 quotation marks (as common, e.
17743 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17749 \begin_layout Labeling
17750 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17752 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668207
17755 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17759 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17763 \begin_inset space ~
17767 \begin_inset space ~
17771 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17775 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17781 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17785 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17789 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17793 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17796 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17802 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668407
17803 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17804 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17805 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17806 the inner marks differ).
17816 \begin_layout Labeling
17817 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17819 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666837
17822 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17826 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17830 \begin_inset space ~
17834 \begin_inset space ~
17838 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17842 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17848 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17852 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17856 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17860 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17863 quotation marks (as common, e.
17864 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17870 \begin_layout Labeling
17871 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17873 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756796
17876 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17880 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17884 \begin_inset space ~
17888 \begin_inset space ~
17892 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17896 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17902 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17906 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17910 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17914 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17917 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
17920 \begin_layout Labeling
17921 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17923 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757086
17924 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17932 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17938 \begin_inset space ~
17942 \begin_inset space ~
17948 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17956 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17960 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17964 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17968 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17972 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17975 quotation marks (as common, e.
17976 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17985 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757158
17986 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17987 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17997 \begin_layout Labeling
17998 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18000 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
18001 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18009 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18015 \begin_inset space ~
18019 \begin_inset space ~
18025 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18033 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18037 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18041 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18045 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18049 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18052 quotation marks (as common, e.
18053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18056 g., in North Korea and China)
18060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18062 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
18063 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18064 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18074 \begin_layout Standard
18076 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667281
18078 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667281
18082 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666272
18084 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667398
18089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18091 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668512
18092 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18093 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18094 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18102 does not necessarily mean
18103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18111 This is why we call them
18112 \begin_inset Quotes els
18116 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18137 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668702
18138 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18140 \begin_inset Quotes els
18144 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18148 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667343
18150 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667350
18151 can be obtained by means of
18156 arg "quote-insert inner"
18160 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668731
18163 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18169 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667602
18173 \begin_layout Standard
18175 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668992
18176 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18177 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18178 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18179 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18180 If you check the setting
18182 Use dynamic quotation marks
18186 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18187 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18190 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18191 they appear in a special color).
18192 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18193 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18198 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18201 \begin_layout Standard
18203 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667904
18204 Individual quotation marks (i.
18205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18208 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18209 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18215 \begin_layout Subsection
18217 \begin_inset Index idx
18220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18221 Typography ! Ligatures
18227 \begin_inset Index idx
18230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18259 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18261 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18268 \begin_layout Standard
18269 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18270 print them as single characters.
18271 These groups are known as
18276 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18277 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18279 Here are the standard ligatures:
18282 \begin_layout Itemize
18286 \begin_layout Itemize
18290 \begin_layout Itemize
18294 \begin_layout Itemize
18298 \begin_layout Itemize
18302 \begin_layout Standard
18303 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18306 \begin_layout Standard
18307 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18308 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18316 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18332 To break a ligature, use
18334 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18335 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18337 \begin_inset space ~
18344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18355 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18372 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18380 \begin_layout Subsection
18382 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18384 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669270
18386 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669270
18390 \begin_inset Index idx
18393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18403 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18410 \begin_layout Standard
18413 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18414 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18418 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18421 \begin_layout Description
18423 The name of the game.
18426 \begin_layout Description
18428 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18432 \begin_layout Description
18434 The \SpecialChar TeX
18435 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18439 \begin_layout Description
18440 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18441 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18445 \begin_layout Standard
18446 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18452 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18460 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18461 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18462 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18463 converges to the number
18464 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18467 : The actual version is
18468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18476 , the previous one was
18477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18488 \begin_layout Subsection
18490 \begin_inset Index idx
18493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18502 \begin_layout Standard
18503 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18504 space between two words.
18505 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18515 for units use the menu
18517 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18518 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18520 \begin_inset space ~
18528 arg "space-insert thin"
18534 \begin_layout Standard
18535 Here is an example to show the differences:
18538 \begin_layout Standard
18539 \begin_inset Tabular
18540 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18541 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18542 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18543 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18550 \begin_inset space ~
18554 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18566 space between number and unit
18573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18578 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18582 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18594 half space between number and unit
18607 \begin_layout Subsection
18609 \begin_inset Index idx
18612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18613 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18621 \begin_layout Standard
18622 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18624 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18625 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18626 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18627 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18628 These bits of text became known as
18639 \begin_layout Standard
18640 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18641 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18642 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18643 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18644 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18645 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18646 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18647 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18648 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18649 \begin_inset Newline newline
18657 \begin_inset Newline newline
18665 \begin_inset Newline newline
18668 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18669 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18670 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18672 \begin_inset space ~
18676 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18678 key "latexcompanion"
18684 \begin_inset space ~
18688 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18695 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18696 's page break mechanism.
18699 \begin_layout Chapter
18700 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18701 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18703 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18710 \begin_layout Standard
18711 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18714 \begin_inset space ~
18720 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18723 \begin_layout Section
18725 \begin_inset Index idx
18728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18744 \begin_layout Standard
18746 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18749 \begin_layout Description
18752 \begin_inset space ~
18755 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18756 \begin_inset Newline newline
18760 \begin_inset Note Note
18763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18764 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18772 \begin_layout Description
18773 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18774 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18775 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18778 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18779 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18781 \begin_inset space ~
18787 \begin_inset Newline newline
18791 \begin_inset Note Comment
18794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18795 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18804 \begin_layout Description
18806 \begin_inset space ~
18809 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18810 set in the document settings under
18812 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18814 \begin_inset space ~
18820 \begin_inset Newline newline
18824 \begin_inset Newline newline
18828 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18837 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18838 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18843 of a comment that appears in the output.
18849 \begin_inset Newline newline
18853 \begin_inset Newline newline
18856 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18859 \begin_layout Standard
18860 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18868 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18872 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18875 \begin_layout Section
18877 \begin_inset Index idx
18880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18887 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18889 name "sec:Footnotes"
18896 \begin_layout Standard
18898 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18901 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18904 or the toolbar button
18907 arg "footnote-insert"
18919 \begin_inset Graphics
18920 filename clipart/footnote.png
18929 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18930 's representation of your footnote.
18940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18959 label, the box will
18963 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18964 Clicking on the box label again will close
18977 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18978 and click on the footnote
18993 \begin_layout Standard
18994 Here is an example footnote:
19002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19003 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19011 \begin_layout Standard
19012 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19013 position where the footnote box is placed.
19014 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19015 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19016 according to the document class.
19018 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19019 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19025 ey are described in the
19028 \begin_inset space ~
19036 \begin_layout Section
19038 \begin_inset Index idx
19041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19050 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19057 \begin_layout Standard
19058 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19060 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19062 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19064 \begin_inset space ~
19069 or the toolbar button
19072 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19098 appearing within your text.
19099 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19100 's representation of your margin
19109 \begin_layout Standard
19110 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19114 \begin_inset Marginal
19117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19119 This is a marginal note.
19127 \begin_layout Standard
19128 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19129 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19130 pages, right on odd pages.
19133 \begin_layout Standard
19134 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19137 \begin_inset space ~
19145 \begin_inset space ~
19153 \begin_layout Section
19154 Graphics and Images
19155 \begin_inset Index idx
19158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19165 \begin_inset Index idx
19168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19177 name "sec:Graphics"
19184 \begin_layout Standard
19185 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19186 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19189 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19194 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19198 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19201 \begin_layout Standard
19202 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19207 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19208 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19210 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19211 \begin_inset space ~
19215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19217 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19224 \begin_layout Standard
19229 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19230 of the image in the output.
19231 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19235 \begin_inset space ~
19239 \begin_inset space ~
19248 \begin_inset space ~
19252 \begin_inset space ~
19256 \begin_inset space ~
19261 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19262 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19270 \begin_layout Standard
19274 \begin_inset space ~
19278 \begin_inset space ~
19283 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19284 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19286 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19291 \begin_inset space ~
19296 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19297 with the image size is printed.
19300 \begin_layout Standard
19301 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19302 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19304 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19307 \begin_layout Standard
19309 \begin_inset Graphics
19310 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19318 \begin_layout Standard
19319 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19320 the image into a float, see section
19321 \begin_inset space ~
19325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19327 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19334 \begin_layout Subsection
19336 \begin_inset Index idx
19339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19348 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19355 \begin_layout Standard
19356 You can insert images in any known file format.
19357 But as we explained in section
19358 \begin_inset space ~
19362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19364 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19368 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19370 therefore uses the program
19374 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19375 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19376 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19377 \begin_inset space ~
19381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19383 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19390 \begin_layout Standard
19391 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19394 \begin_layout Description
19396 \begin_inset space ~
19399 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19400 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19401 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19405 Graphics Interchange Format
19406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19409 (GIF, file extension
19410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19422 \begin_inset Index idx
19425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19457 Portable Network Graphics
19458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19461 (PNG, file extension
19462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19474 \begin_inset Index idx
19477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19509 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19513 (JPG, file extension
19514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19538 \begin_inset Index idx
19541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19572 \begin_layout Description
19574 \begin_inset space ~
19577 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19579 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19580 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19581 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19582 \begin_inset Newline newline
19585 Scalable image formats can be
19586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19589 Scalable Vector Graphics
19590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19593 (SVG, file extension
19594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19606 \begin_inset Index idx
19609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19641 Encapsulated PostScript
19642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19645 (EPS, file extension
19646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19658 \begin_inset Index idx
19661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19693 Portable Document Format
19694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19697 (PDF, file extension
19698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19710 \begin_inset Index idx
19713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19728 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19729 result will not be scalable.
19730 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19736 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19744 \begin_layout Standard
19745 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19752 \begin_layout Subsection
19753 Grouping of Image Settings
19754 \begin_inset Index idx
19757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19758 Images ! Settings grouping
19766 \begin_layout Standard
19767 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19769 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19770 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19772 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19773 need to manually change each of them.
19777 \begin_layout Standard
19778 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19781 \begin_inset space ~
19785 \begin_inset space ~
19797 \begin_inset space ~
19801 \begin_inset space ~
19807 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19808 and checking the name of the desired group.
19811 \begin_layout Section
19813 \begin_inset Index idx
19816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19832 \begin_layout Standard
19833 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19836 arg "tabular-insert"
19841 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19845 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19846 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19847 from the rest of the table.
19848 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19849 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19851 Here is an example table:
19854 \begin_layout Standard
19856 \begin_inset Tabular
19857 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19858 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19859 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19860 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19861 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19862 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20062 \begin_layout Subsection
20066 \begin_layout Standard
20067 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20070 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20074 This brings up the table dialog.
20075 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20076 cursor is placed currently.
20077 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20078 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20079 done on all of your selection.
20082 \begin_layout Standard
20083 In addition to the table dialog, the
20086 \begin_inset space ~
20091 helps you in setting table properties.
20092 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20095 \begin_layout Standard
20099 \begin_inset space ~
20104 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20105 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20106 current cell respectively.
20107 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20109 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20110 of text, see section
20111 \begin_inset space ~
20115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20117 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20124 \begin_layout Standard
20125 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20126 using the check box
20135 This will merge the cells to
20139 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20140 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20141 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20142 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20143 in the last row without the upper border:
20146 \begin_layout Standard
20148 \begin_inset Tabular
20149 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20150 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20151 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20152 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20153 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20154 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20165 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20174 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20250 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20285 \begin_layout Standard
20286 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20287 -arguments for the table.
20288 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20289 explained in the chapter
20296 \begin_inset space ~
20302 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20303 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20304 but are visible in the output.
20307 \begin_layout Standard
20308 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20316 Most DVI-viewers are
20320 able to display rotations.
20328 \begin_layout Standard
20333 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20338 adds lines for all cell borders.
20341 \begin_layout Subsection
20343 \begin_inset Index idx
20346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20347 Tables ! Multi-page
20353 \begin_inset Index idx
20356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20365 \begin_layout Standard
20366 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20369 \begin_inset space ~
20373 \begin_inset space ~
20381 \begin_inset space ~
20386 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20387 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20390 \begin_layout Description
20395 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20396 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20397 Except for the first page, if
20400 \begin_inset space ~
20408 \begin_layout Description
20412 \begin_inset space ~
20417 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20418 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20421 \begin_layout Description
20426 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20427 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20428 except for the last page, if
20431 \begin_inset space ~
20439 \begin_layout Description
20443 \begin_inset space ~
20448 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20449 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20452 \begin_layout Description
20453 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20454 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20456 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20460 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20463 \begin_inset space ~
20471 \begin_layout Standard
20472 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20473 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20474 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20480 In this context, first means first in this order:
20483 \begin_inset space ~
20495 \begin_inset space ~
20500 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20503 \begin_layout Standard
20505 \begin_inset Tabular
20506 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20507 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20508 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20509 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20510 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20511 <row endfirsthead="true">
20512 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20518 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20523 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20532 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20542 <row endfirsthead="true">
20543 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20554 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20563 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20575 <row endhead="true">
20576 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20587 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20596 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20606 <row endhead="true">
20607 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20618 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20627 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20639 <row endfoot="true">
20640 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20651 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20660 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20691 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21632 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21641 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21650 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21661 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21692 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21723 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21754 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21785 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21816 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21847 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21878 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21909 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21940 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21971 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22002 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22033 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22064 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22095 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22126 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22157 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22188 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22219 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22250 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22281 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22312 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22343 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22374 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22405 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22436 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22467 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22498 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22529 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22560 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22591 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22621 <row endlastfoot="true">
22622 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22633 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22642 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22659 \begin_layout Subsection
22661 \begin_inset Index idx
22664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22673 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22680 \begin_layout Standard
22681 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22682 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22683 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22684 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22688 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22691 \begin_layout Standard
22692 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22693 for the column in the table dialog.
22694 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22695 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22699 \begin_layout Standard
22701 \begin_inset Tabular
22702 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22703 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22704 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22705 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22706 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22726 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22795 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22851 This is longer now.
22856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22907 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22908 This is longer now.
22913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22939 \begin_layout Standard
22940 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22941 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22946 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22947 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22953 Selection with the mouse or with
22957 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22958 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22959 the selection from outside the table.
22962 \begin_layout Section
22964 \begin_inset Index idx
22967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22974 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22983 \begin_layout Subsection
22987 \begin_layout Standard
22988 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22989 have a fixed location.
22991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22998 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23006 \begin_inset space ~
23011 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23012 too many notes on the current page.
23015 \begin_layout Standard
23016 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23017 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23018 and pages without text.
23019 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23020 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23021 Floats are therefore numbered.
23022 Referencing is described in section
23023 \begin_inset space ~
23027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23029 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23036 \begin_layout Standard
23037 To insert a float, use the menu
23039 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23043 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23044 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23046 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23047 \begin_inset Index idx
23050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23056 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23057 paragraph within the float.
23058 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23059 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23060 left-clicking on the box label.
23061 A closed float box looks like this:
23062 \begin_inset Graphics
23063 filename clipart/float.png
23068 – a gray button with a red label.
23071 \begin_layout Standard
23072 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23074 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23077 \begin_layout Subsection
23079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23081 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23086 \begin_inset Index idx
23089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23090 Floats ! Figure floats
23098 \begin_layout Standard
23100 \begin_inset space ~
23104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23106 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23110 was created using the menu
23112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23113 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23119 arg "float-insert figure"
23123 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23126 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23132 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23136 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23137 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23139 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23141 \begin_inset space ~
23149 arg "layout-paragraph"
23155 \begin_layout Standard
23156 \begin_inset Float figure
23161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23163 \begin_inset Graphics
23164 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23174 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23177 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23179 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23183 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
23196 \begin_layout Standard
23197 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23198 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23200 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23209 ) and refer to it using the menu
23211 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23217 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23221 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23222 vague references like
23223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23230 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23231 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23241 For more about cross-references, see section
23242 \begin_inset space ~
23246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23248 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23255 \begin_layout Standard
23256 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23257 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23258 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23259 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23260 as described in section
23261 \begin_inset space ~
23265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23267 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23273 \begin_inset space ~
23277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23279 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23283 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23284 You can also set the images one below the other.
23286 \begin_inset space ~
23290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23292 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23299 reference "fig:Platypus"
23303 are the subfigures.
23306 \begin_layout Standard
23307 \begin_inset Float figure
23312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23313 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23317 \begin_inset Float figure
23322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23323 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23326 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23328 name "fig:Undefinable"
23340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23341 \begin_inset Graphics
23342 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23353 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23357 \begin_inset Float figure
23362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23363 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23368 name "fig:Platypus"
23380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23381 \begin_inset Graphics
23382 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23394 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23401 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23406 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23410 Two distorted images.
23423 \begin_layout Subsection
23425 \begin_inset Index idx
23428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23429 Floats ! Table floats
23437 \begin_layout Standard
23438 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23440 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23441 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23444 or the toolbar button
23447 arg "float-insert table"
23451 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23452 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23453 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23455 \begin_inset space ~
23459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23461 reference "tab:Table-float"
23468 \begin_layout Standard
23469 \begin_inset Float table
23474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23475 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23480 name "tab:Table-float"
23492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23494 \begin_inset Tabular
23495 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23496 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23497 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23498 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23499 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23626 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23647 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23650 \end{array}\right]$
23658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23671 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23692 \begin_layout Subsection
23694 \begin_inset Index idx
23697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23706 \begin_layout Standard
23708 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23709 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23710 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23712 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23720 \begin_inset space ~
23728 \begin_layout Section
23730 \begin_inset Index idx
23733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23742 \begin_layout Standard
23744 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23746 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23747 \begin_inset space \space{}
23754 \begin_layout Standard
23755 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23756 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23758 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23762 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23763 and its alignment within the page.
23766 \begin_layout Standard
23768 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23778 height_special "totalheight"
23783 backgroundcolor "none"
23786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23789 This is a minipage.
23790 The text is set in an italic style.
23793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23796 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23797 another formatting.
23805 \begin_layout Standard
23806 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23809 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23813 as described in section
23814 \begin_inset space ~
23818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23820 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23825 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23831 \begin_layout Standard
23832 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23842 height_special "totalheight"
23847 backgroundcolor "none"
23850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23851 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23852 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23858 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23862 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23872 height_special "totalheight"
23877 backgroundcolor "none"
23880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23881 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23882 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23890 \begin_layout Standard
23891 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23897 \begin_layout Standard
23898 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23900 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23907 \begin_inset space ~
23915 \begin_layout Chapter
23916 Mathematical Formulas
23917 \begin_inset Index idx
23920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23927 \begin_inset Index idx
23930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23959 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23961 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23968 \begin_layout Standard
23969 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23974 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23977 \begin_layout Section
23979 \begin_inset Index idx
23982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23991 \begin_layout Standard
23992 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24005 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24007 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24008 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24009 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24011 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24017 \begin_layout Standard
24018 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24022 \begin_inset space ~
24027 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24030 \begin_layout Standard
24031 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24032 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24035 \begin_layout Standard
24036 This is a line with an inline formula
24037 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24043 \begin_layout Standard
24044 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24045 paragraph, like this one:
24046 \begin_inset Formula
24053 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24056 \begin_layout Standard
24058 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24060 For example, typing
24061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24074 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24075 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24079 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24082 \begin_inset space ~
24090 \begin_layout Subsection
24091 Navigating in Formulas
24092 \begin_inset Index idx
24095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24104 \begin_layout Standard
24105 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24106 achieved with the arrow keys.
24108 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24109 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24114 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24115 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24119 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24123 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24126 \end{array}\right]$
24134 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24139 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24140 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24143 \begin_layout Standard
24148 , printed in this document as
24149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24153 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24160 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24161 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24162 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24167 For example, if you want
24168 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24176 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24186 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24190 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24195 , since in the latter case only the
24198 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24203 will be under the square root sign:
24204 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24210 \begin_layout Standard
24211 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24213 \begin_inset Formula
24215 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24224 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24225 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24228 \begin_layout Subsection
24232 \begin_layout Standard
24233 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24234 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24238 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24239 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24240 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24241 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24242 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24246 \begin_layout Subsection
24247 Exponents and Subscripts
24248 \begin_inset Index idx
24251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24258 \begin_inset Index idx
24261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24270 \begin_layout Standard
24271 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24274 arg "math-superscript"
24280 arg "math-subscript"
24283 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24285 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24288 , type in a formula
24291 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24301 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24307 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24311 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24317 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24323 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24332 , you have to use an extra
24336 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24337 For example, if you want
24338 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24344 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24350 Subscripts are similar: To get
24351 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24357 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24365 \begin_layout Subsection
24367 \begin_inset Index idx
24370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24379 \begin_layout Standard
24380 Create a fraction either with the command
24386 or by using the icon
24389 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24395 \begin_inset space ~
24401 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24402 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24403 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24408 To move back up, press
24413 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24414 \begin_inset Formula
24416 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24419 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24427 \begin_layout Subsection
24429 \begin_inset Index idx
24432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24441 \begin_layout Standard
24442 Roots can be created using the
24445 \begin_inset space ~
24453 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24459 arg "math-insert \\root"
24481 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24487 always produces a square root.
24490 \begin_layout Subsection
24491 Operators with Limits
24492 \begin_inset Index idx
24495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24502 \begin_inset Index idx
24505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24512 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24514 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24521 \begin_layout Standard
24523 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24527 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24530 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24531 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24532 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24533 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24534 The sum operator will automatically place its
24535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24542 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24544 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24548 \begin_inset Formula
24550 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24555 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24559 \begin_layout Standard
24560 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24562 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24563 behind the operator and using the menu
24565 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24566 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24568 \begin_inset space ~
24572 \begin_inset space ~
24586 \begin_layout Standard
24587 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24596 \begin_inset Index idx
24599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24606 \begin_inset Formula
24608 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24613 which will place the
24614 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24626 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24627 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24633 \begin_layout Standard
24634 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24641 Have a look at section
24642 \begin_inset space ~
24646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24648 reference "subsec:Functions"
24652 for an explanation of function macros.
24655 \begin_layout Subsection
24657 \begin_inset Index idx
24660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24669 \begin_layout Standard
24670 Most math symbols can be found in the
24673 \begin_inset space ~
24678 under one of several categories; including
24695 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24699 \begin_layout Standard
24700 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24701 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24702 don't have to use the
24705 \begin_inset space ~
24710 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24712 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24715 \begin_layout Subsection
24717 \begin_inset Index idx
24720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24729 \begin_layout Standard
24730 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24736 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24742 \begin_inset space ~
24750 arg "math-insert \\space"
24754 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24755 For example, the sequence
24760 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24763 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24765 \begin_inset Graphics
24766 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24771 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24772 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24773 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24774 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24775 , because they are negative
24777 Here are two examples:
24780 \begin_layout Standard
24790 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24796 \begin_layout Standard
24806 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24812 \begin_layout Subsection
24814 \begin_inset Index idx
24817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24826 name "subsec:Functions"
24833 \begin_layout Standard
24837 \begin_inset space ~
24842 contains under the button
24845 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24848 a number of function macros, such as
24849 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24853 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24861 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24868 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24869 avoid confusions, because
24870 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24874 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24880 \begin_layout Standard
24881 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24883 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24887 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24893 \begin_layout Standard
24894 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24895 are placed, as described in section
24896 \begin_inset space ~
24900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24902 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24909 \begin_layout Subsection
24911 \begin_inset Index idx
24914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24923 \begin_layout Standard
24924 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24926 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24927 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24928 commands, for example, to enter
24929 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24932 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24933 Our example is entered by typing
24938 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24945 \begin_inset space ~
24949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24951 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24955 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24958 \begin_layout Standard
24959 \begin_inset Float table
24964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24965 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24970 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24974 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24984 \begin_inset Tabular
24985 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24986 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24987 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24988 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24989 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25073 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25127 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25181 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25235 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25289 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25343 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25397 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25451 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25505 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25550 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25571 \begin_layout Standard
25572 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25575 \begin_inset space ~
25583 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25586 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25590 \begin_layout Section
25591 Brackets and Delimiters
25592 \begin_inset Index idx
25595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25602 \begin_inset Index idx
25605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25614 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25621 \begin_layout Standard
25622 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25624 For some purposes, using just the keys
25629 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25630 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25631 toolbar delimiter icon
25634 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25638 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25639 \begin_inset Formula
25641 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25649 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25650 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25654 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25657 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25663 \begin_inset Formula
25665 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25673 \begin_layout Standard
25674 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25675 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25679 \begin_layout Standard
25680 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25681 left side and right side.
25682 If you use the option
25685 \begin_inset space ~
25690 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25691 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25693 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25698 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25699 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25702 \begin_layout Standard
25703 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25704 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25705 is to go inside the brackets.
25706 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25711 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25712 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25713 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25717 arg "math-delim ( )"
25723 \begin_layout Section
25724 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25725 \begin_inset Index idx
25728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25735 \begin_inset Index idx
25738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25745 \begin_inset Index idx
25748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25749 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25757 \begin_layout Standard
25758 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25762 \begin_inset space ~
25770 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25774 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25775 Here is an example:
25776 \begin_inset Formula
25778 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25787 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25788 \begin_inset space ~
25792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25794 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25799 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25800 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25801 This alignment is set in the box
25806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25855 for every column as default.
25856 For example, the sequence
25857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25868 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25869 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25870 corresponds to the relevant column.
25871 The result will look like this:
25872 \begin_inset Formula
25875 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25876 column & has & has\,right\\
25877 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25886 \begin_layout Standard
25887 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25890 arg "newline-insert newline"
25893 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25894 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25896 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25899 or the math toolbar.
25902 \begin_layout Standard
25903 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25904 It can be created with the menu
25906 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25907 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25909 \begin_inset space ~
25921 Here is an example:
25922 \begin_inset Formula
25936 \begin_layout Standard
25937 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25940 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25943 arg "newline-insert newline"
25947 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25952 arg "newline-insert newline"
25955 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25963 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25964 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25965 A new row is created by every further entry of
25968 arg "newline-insert newline"
25972 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25973 Here is an example:
25974 \begin_inset Formula
25976 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25977 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25982 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25983 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25984 \begin_inset Formula
25986 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25994 \begin_layout Standard
25995 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26002 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26003 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26006 reference "eq:asquared"
26011 The other types are described in section
26012 \begin_inset space ~
26016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26018 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26025 \begin_layout Section
26026 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26027 \begin_inset Index idx
26030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26031 Math ! Formula numbering
26037 \begin_inset Index idx
26040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26041 Math ! Referencing formulas
26047 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26049 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26056 \begin_layout Standard
26057 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26059 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26060 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26062 \begin_inset space ~
26066 \begin_inset space ~
26074 arg "math-number-toggle"
26078 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26079 within parentheses.
26080 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26081 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26082 the document class.
26083 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26084 separated by a dot:
26085 \begin_inset Formula
26095 arg "math-number-toggle"
26098 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26099 You can only number displayed formulas.
26102 \begin_layout Standard
26103 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26105 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26106 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26108 \begin_inset space ~
26112 \begin_inset space ~
26120 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26123 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26124 \begin_inset Formula
26127 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26133 To number all lines use the shortcut
26136 arg "math-number-toggle"
26142 \begin_layout Standard
26143 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26146 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26147 A label is inserted with the menu
26149 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26158 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26159 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26160 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26172 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26173 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26174 We inserted in the following example the label
26175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26182 in the second line:
26183 \begin_inset Formula
26185 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26186 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26191 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26192 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26193 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26195 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26197 \begin_inset space ~
26205 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26209 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26210 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26211 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26212 as the formula number:
26215 \begin_layout Standard
26216 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26219 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26226 \begin_layout Standard
26227 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26228 's cross-reference box are described in section
26229 \begin_inset space ~
26233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26235 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26240 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26248 \begin_layout Section
26249 User defined math macros
26250 \begin_inset Index idx
26253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26262 \begin_layout Standard
26264 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26265 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26266 Math macros are explained in section
26269 \begin_inset space ~
26281 \begin_layout Section
26285 \begin_layout Subsection
26287 \begin_inset Index idx
26290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26299 \begin_layout Standard
26300 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26301 To set a font in a formula, use the
26304 \begin_inset space ~
26312 arg "math-insert \\font"
26315 , or enter its command, listed in table
26316 \begin_inset space ~
26320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26322 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26329 \begin_layout Standard
26330 \begin_inset Float table
26335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26336 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26341 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26345 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26355 \begin_inset Tabular
26356 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26357 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26358 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26359 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26391 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26418 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26445 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26478 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26505 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26532 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26566 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26593 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26627 \begin_layout Standard
26628 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26636 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26652 \begin_layout Standard
26653 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26654 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26659 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26660 space when you need a space in the box.
26661 Here is an example where
26662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26673 denotes the set of numbers:
26674 \begin_inset Formula
26676 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26684 \begin_layout Standard
26685 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26686 You can, for example, put a character in
26695 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26699 \begin_inset Newline newline
26702 So it is better not to use this feature.
26705 \begin_layout Standard
26706 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26707 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26711 \begin_inset Newline newline
26714 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26720 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26721 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26727 \begin_layout Standard
26734 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26737 \begin_layout Standard
26738 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26740 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26741 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26743 \begin_inset space ~
26751 \begin_layout Subsection
26753 \begin_inset Index idx
26756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26765 \begin_layout Standard
26766 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26768 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26772 \begin_inset space ~
26776 \begin_inset space ~
26784 \begin_inset space ~
26792 arg "math-insert \\font"
26796 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26797 in black instead of blue.
26798 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26799 Here is an example:
26800 \begin_inset Formula
26803 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26804 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26813 \begin_layout Subsection
26815 \begin_inset Index idx
26818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26827 \begin_layout Standard
26828 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26829 automatically chosen in most situations.
26847 For most characters,
26855 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26856 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26861 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26862 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26863 thinks are appropriate.
26864 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26867 arg "math-insert \\style"
26871 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26872 For example, you can set
26873 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26876 , which is normally in
26885 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26889 The four styles are used in the following example:
26892 \begin_layout Standard
26893 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26897 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26901 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26905 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26911 \begin_layout Standard
26912 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26913 is set in a particular size with the menu
26915 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26917 \begin_inset space ~
26922 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26923 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26924 will be adjusted to correspond.
26925 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26936 \begin_layout Standard
26940 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26946 \begin_layout Section
26947 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26949 \begin_inset Index idx
26952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26959 \begin_inset Index idx
26962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26971 \begin_layout Standard
26973 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26974 that are in common use.
26977 \begin_layout Subsection
26978 Enabling AMS-Support
26981 \begin_layout Standard
26982 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26983 the document by selecting the checkbox
26986 \begin_inset space ~
26990 \begin_inset space ~
26994 \begin_inset space ~
27001 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27005 \begin_inset Index idx
27008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27009 Document ! Settings
27017 \begin_inset space ~
27023 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27024 -errors in formulas,
27025 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27028 \begin_layout Subsection
27030 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27032 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27037 \begin_inset Index idx
27040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27041 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27049 \begin_layout Standard
27050 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27051 provides a selection of different formula types.
27053 allows you to choose between
27074 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27075 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27082 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27085 \begin_layout Chapter
27089 \begin_layout Section
27091 \begin_inset Index idx
27094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27103 name "sec:Cross-References"
27110 \begin_layout Standard
27111 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27112 's strengths is cross-references.
27113 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27115 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27116 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27117 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27120 \begin_layout Enumerate
27124 \begin_layout Enumerate
27125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27127 name "enu:Second-item"
27134 \begin_layout Enumerate
27138 \begin_layout Standard
27139 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27141 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27144 or by pressing the toolbar button
27151 A gray label box like this:
27152 \begin_inset Graphics
27153 filename clipart/label.png
27157 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27159 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27194 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27195 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27211 \begin_layout Standard
27212 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27217 or the toolbar button
27220 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27224 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27225 \begin_inset Graphics
27226 filename clipart/reference.png
27230 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27232 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27245 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27249 \begin_layout Standard
27250 As an alternative to
27252 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27255 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27260 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27261 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27263 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27275 \begin_layout Standard
27276 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27277 \begin_inset space ~
27281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27283 reference "enu:Second-item"
27290 \begin_layout Standard
27291 It is recommended to use a protected space
27295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27296 described in section
27297 \begin_inset space ~
27301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27303 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27312 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27313 line breaks between them.
27316 \begin_layout Standard
27317 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27320 \begin_layout Description
27321 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27324 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27331 \begin_layout Description
27332 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27333 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27345 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27352 \begin_layout Description
27353 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27354 \begin_inset space ~
27358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27359 LatexCommand pageref
27360 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27367 \begin_layout Description
27369 \begin_inset space ~
27373 \begin_inset space ~
27376 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27378 LatexCommand vpageref
27379 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27384 \begin_inset Newline newline
27387 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27388 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27389 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27390 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27391 it prints “on the next page”.
27392 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27395 \begin_layout Description
27397 \begin_inset space ~
27401 \begin_inset space ~
27405 \begin_inset space ~
27408 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27411 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27416 \begin_inset Newline newline
27419 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27425 ; otherwise it behaves like
27429 \begin_inset space ~
27433 \begin_inset space ~
27442 \begin_layout Description
27444 \begin_inset space ~
27447 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27448 \begin_inset Newline newline
27452 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27460 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27470 \begin_inset Index idx
27473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27475 -packages ! prettyref
27481 \begin_inset Index idx
27484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27486 -packages ! refstyle
27497 \begin_inset Newline newline
27500 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27501 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27504 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27508 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27509 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27517 is the default and preferred because
27521 supports only English documents.
27522 The format is specified by using the command
27534 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27535 preamble of the document.
27536 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27554 \begin_inset Newline newline
27561 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27566 \begin_inset Newline newline
27577 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27578 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27580 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27581 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27586 , you might do so as follows:
27587 \begin_inset Newline newline
27594 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27599 \begin_inset Newline newline
27602 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27603 the package documentation
27604 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27606 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27612 \begin_inset Newline newline
27623 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27630 \begin_layout Description
27632 \begin_inset space ~
27635 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27637 LatexCommand nameref
27638 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27645 \begin_layout Description
27647 \begin_inset space ~
27650 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27651 label for the reference:
27652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27653 LatexCommand labelonly
27654 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27659 \begin_inset Newline newline
27662 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27663 Code, if you want to issue a command
27664 that \SpecialChar LyX
27670 , then you may want to use the
27673 \begin_inset space ~
27678 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27688 This is the form needed for e.
27689 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27693 \begin_inset space \space{}
27700 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27701 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27703 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27707 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27711 \begin_layout Standard
27712 You can only use the style
27716 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27720 is always possible.
27723 \begin_layout Standard
27724 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27725 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27727 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27728 \begin_inset space ~
27732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27734 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27741 \begin_layout Standard
27742 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27746 \begin_inset space ~
27750 \begin_inset space ~
27755 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27756 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27759 \begin_inset space ~
27764 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27765 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27768 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27774 \begin_layout Standard
27775 You can change labels at any time.
27776 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27777 do not need to think about this.
27780 \begin_layout Standard
27781 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27783 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27787 \begin_layout Standard
27788 References are described in detail in the section
27789 \begin_inset space ~
27799 \begin_inset space ~
27807 \begin_layout Section
27808 Table of Contents and other Listings
27809 \begin_inset Index idx
27812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27819 \begin_inset Index idx
27822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27823 Navigating ! Outline
27829 \begin_inset Index idx
27832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27839 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27848 \begin_layout Subsection
27850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27852 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27859 \begin_layout Standard
27860 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27863 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27865 \begin_inset space ~
27869 \begin_inset space ~
27875 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27877 If you click on it, the
27881 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27882 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27883 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27885 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27887 \begin_inset space ~
27892 that is described in section
27893 \begin_inset space ~
27897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27899 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27906 \begin_layout Standard
27907 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27908 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27910 \begin_inset space ~
27914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27916 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27920 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27922 \begin_inset space ~
27926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27928 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27932 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27934 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27937 \begin_layout Subsection
27938 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27941 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27948 \begin_layout Standard
27949 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
27951 You can insert them via the
27953 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27957 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
27960 \begin_layout Section
27961 URLs and Hyperlinks
27962 \begin_inset Index idx
27965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27972 \begin_inset Index idx
27975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27984 \begin_layout Subsection
27986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27995 \begin_layout Standard
27996 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
27998 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28004 \begin_layout Standard
28005 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28007 \begin_inset Flex URL
28010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28020 \begin_layout Standard
28021 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28027 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28031 \begin_layout Standard
28032 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28040 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28049 \begin_layout Subsection
28051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28053 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28060 \begin_layout Standard
28061 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28063 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28066 or with the toolbar button
28073 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28082 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28083 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28084 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28086 name "LyX's homepage"
28087 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28092 , an Email address like this:
28093 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28095 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28096 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28102 , or a link to a file.
28105 \begin_layout Standard
28106 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28119 to the link target.
28122 \begin_layout Standard
28123 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28124 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28125 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28126 the text style dialog.
28127 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28131 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28133 name "LyX's homepage"
28134 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28142 \begin_layout Standard
28143 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28147 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28149 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28150 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28154 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28156 \begin_inset Newline newline
28164 \begin_inset Newline newline
28171 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28174 \begin_layout Section
28176 \begin_inset Index idx
28179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28188 name "sec:Appendices"
28195 \begin_layout Standard
28196 Appendices are created with the menu
28198 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28200 \begin_inset space ~
28204 \begin_inset space ~
28210 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28211 as the appendix part of the book.
28212 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28215 \begin_layout Standard
28216 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28217 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28218 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28219 and the subsection number.
28220 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28224 \begin_layout Standard
28226 \begin_inset space ~
28230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28232 reference "chap:Credits"
28237 \begin_inset space ~
28241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28243 reference "subsec:Export"
28250 \begin_layout Section
28252 \begin_inset Index idx
28255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28264 name "sec:Bibliography"
28271 \begin_layout Standard
28272 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28274 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880152
28276 \change_deleted -712698321 1483880151
28280 You can include a bibliography database,
28281 \change_deleted -712698321 1483880276
28286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28287 Known under the name
28288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28291 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28303 which is explained in
28304 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28305 the next subsection
28306 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890955
28308 \begin_inset space ~
28312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28314 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28323 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28329 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28331 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883190
28335 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883197
28339 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890942
28343 \begin_inset space ~
28347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28349 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28354 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883212
28358 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28360 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28362 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880176
28365 author-year citations,
28366 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883518
28367 and if you have more than a handful of references,
28370 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28372 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883526
28373 should seriously consider
28380 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880298
28382 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28385 a bibliography database.
28386 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883092
28390 \begin_layout Standard
28392 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883578
28393 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28394 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28398 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28399 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28400 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28401 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28402 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28407 \begin_layout Subsection
28409 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885645
28410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28412 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28418 The Bibliography Environment
28421 \begin_layout Standard
28426 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28428 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28437 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28440 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880726
28441 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28442 of ASCII characters only.
28445 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28455 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28456 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880732
28460 \begin_layout Standard
28461 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28463 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28466 or the toolbar button
28469 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28473 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28474 containing the available citations.
28475 Select one or more keys from the list and
28485 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28486 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28490 \begin_layout Standard
28491 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28492 entry with surrounding brackets.
28497 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28498 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28510 \begin_layout Standard
28514 Companion Second Edition
28517 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28519 key "latexcompanion"
28527 \begin_layout Standard
28528 The \SpecialChar LyX
28529 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28530 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28538 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880908
28542 \begin_layout Standard
28544 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881419
28545 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using
28550 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28562 Author A and Author B(Year)
28563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28570 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28572 Then, if you select
28578 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28582 \begin_inset Index idx
28585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28587 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881295
28588 Document ! Settings
28595 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28601 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28608 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28613 \begin_layout Standard
28614 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28617 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28619 \begin_inset space ~
28627 arg "layout-paragraph"
28631 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28634 \begin_layout Subsection
28635 Bibliography databases
28636 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882661
28637 (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28641 \begin_inset Index idx
28644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28645 Bibliography ! Databases
28651 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882653
28653 \begin_inset Index idx
28656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28657 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28668 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28675 \begin_layout Standard
28676 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same
28677 \change_deleted -712698321 1483881524
28679 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881525
28682 in different documents.
28686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28687 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28689 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28690 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28695 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28697 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28698 your working field in a database.
28699 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28700 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28701 list for that document.
28702 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28706 \begin_layout Standard
28707 The database is a text file with the file extension
28708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28719 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28720 The format is explained in
28721 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28728 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28730 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28732 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28738 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28739 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28740 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28742 \begin_inset Flex URL
28745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28747 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28753 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881708
28757 \begin_layout Standard
28759 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885542
28761 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28762 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28763 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28765 It is quite established and mature, and there is a huge range of existing
28766 styles available, but it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to
28767 more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and
28769 Those are addressed by a rather new and ambitious approach,
28778 reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28779 (although it has been significantly
28780 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28787 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882543
28792 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28793 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28794 might conversely fail to correctly
28795 handle databases that use specific
28806 ), but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28810 \begin_layout Standard
28812 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882638
28813 Both approaches are described in turn.
28816 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28818 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28819 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28821 \begin_inset Index idx
28824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28826 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28827 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28838 \begin_layout Standard
28840 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882678
28842 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882681
28846 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882690
28847 via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28852 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28857 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28859 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882685
28863 \begin_inset space ~
28869 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28870 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
28871 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882797
28872 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28882 Add bibliography to TOC
28884 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28889 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28890 in the document or just the cited references.
28893 \begin_layout Standard
28895 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882781
28896 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28899 style file is a text file with the file extension
28900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28911 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28912 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28913 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28914 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28916 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28922 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28923 \begin_inset Newline newline
28927 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28929 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28940 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883972
28941 In this document, we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28946 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
28952 \begin_layout Standard
28953 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28954 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883993
28958 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28960 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883999
28962 \begin_inset Index idx
28965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28967 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884003
28968 Bibliography ! Biblatex
28976 \begin_layout Standard
28978 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884100
28979 Accessing a database via
28983 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28986 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28991 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28993 \begin_inset space ~
28999 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
29000 In this window you can add one or more databases, but as opposed to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29002 you cannot select a
29006 file (we will explain later, why).
29007 As with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29010 Add bibliography to TOC
29012 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
29017 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
29018 in the document or just the cited references.
29021 \begin_layout Standard
29023 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884492
29028 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (a text file with
29030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29041 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like, and a citation style
29043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29054 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29055 Usually, such style files come in pairs, and it makes most sense to use
29056 matching styles, but it is possible to mix any citation style with any
29057 bibliography style.
29060 \begin_layout Standard
29062 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891283
29067 styles are not set in the
29070 \begin_inset space ~
29081 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29082 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29086 However, in the former dialog (in the
29090 field which is only visible if you use
29094 ), you can enter options that change the way the bibliography is displayed
29095 (for instance concerning its heading).
29096 These options are detailed in the
29101 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29113 \begin_layout Standard
29115 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885667
29116 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29117 \begin_inset space ~
29121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29123 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29133 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29135 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885726
29136 Bibliography Processors
29139 \begin_layout Standard
29140 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29142 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885808
29143 a bibliography processor, that is an external program that reads a database,
29144 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included
29149 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885822
29151 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885823
29155 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885903
29161 As the whole approach, it has the advantage that it is very mature and
29162 widespread, but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations, due to
29166 \begin_layout Standard
29168 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885977
29169 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address (some of)
29171 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29172 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885997
29173 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29178 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886029
29179 do this on a general level in
29181 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29182 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29183 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29186 , or for individual documents
29187 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886038
29188 choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
29197 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29198 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29200 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886043
29205 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29206 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29207 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29213 The following variants are
29214 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886168
29216 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886173
29217 available by default
29222 \begin_layout Description
29224 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886257
29225 a specific, modern processor developed exclusively for
29229 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29237 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory
29238 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886272
29239 , but does not work with other bibliography packages (e.
29240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29244 \begin_inset space \space{}
29251 ), only with the package
29254 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886347
29257 and many specific features
29264 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886353
29265 recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
29267 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886386
29272 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29281 \begin_layout Description
29282 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29283 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29284 with all bibliography packages,
29285 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886412
29287 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886414
29291 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886476
29292 it will probably fail with even moderately sized
29293 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886506
29295 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886506
29301 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886524
29304 bibliographies, due to the limited memory.
29309 \begin_layout Description
29310 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29311 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886652
29312 (but no Unicode support)
29314 , larger memory than
29318 , works with all bibliography packages
29319 \change_inserted -712698321 1484330876
29320 , although more complex
29324 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29328 features are supported.
29331 \begin_layout Standard
29333 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331301
29335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29342 bibliography processor set in
29344 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29345 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29356 bibliography processor in
29358 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29359 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29360 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29363 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29364 selects the most appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliogra
29373 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29374 -based bibliography styles).
29375 This should suit most needs.
29380 \begin_layout Standard
29382 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331395
29383 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29384 By default, this is
29392 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29393 You can adjust it in
29395 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29396 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29397 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29405 \begin_layout Standard
29407 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886683
29408 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29410 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331419
29411 Selected bibliography processors
29413 can be controlled with options that you can add below the
29414 \change_deleted -712698321 1484331437
29415 specification of the variants
29416 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331439
29420 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29422 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886810
29426 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886842
29429 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29431 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886842
29437 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886972
29439 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29447 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886836
29459 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887134
29463 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29465 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887497
29471 \begin_layout Standard
29473 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887548
29475 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29478 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887556
29479 When you select the option
29481 Sectioned bibliography
29485 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29486 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29489 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
29493 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887559
29495 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887559
29499 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887560
29503 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887564
29506 are explained in detail in section
29508 Customizing Bibliographies
29512 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29514 \change_inserted -712698321 1501054457
29521 Additional Features
29526 \begin_layout Standard
29528 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882904
29529 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
29530 the two methods of creating them.
29531 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29532 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29533 We used the style file
29537 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
29542 \begin_layout Subsection
29544 \begin_inset Index idx
29547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29548 Bibliography ! Citation format
29554 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881374
29556 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29558 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29567 \begin_layout Standard
29569 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888028
29570 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29571 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29575 numerical citation (as used in this document), alpha-numerical citations
29577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29584 ) or author-year citations (as
29585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29594 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29598 \begin_layout Standard
29600 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888432
29601 By default, a simple numeric citation style (as in this document) is used.
29604 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29608 \begin_inset Index idx
29611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29613 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888079
29614 Document ! Settings
29621 \SpecialChar menuseparator
29624 , however, you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred
29625 bibliography approach.
29628 \begin_layout Standard
29630 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888408
29635 environment, your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29640 , which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29644 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29651 \begin_layout Standard
29653 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888505
29654 All other choices require a database approach, either Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29662 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29670 Currently, the following options are available:
29673 \begin_layout Itemize
29675 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888574
29682 BibTeX-based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric
29686 \begin_layout Itemize
29688 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889266
29697 package and lets you select a style in the combo boxes
29699 Biblatex citation style
29703 Biblatex bibliography style
29706 Many different style variants are supported.
29711 package can be entered in the
29718 \begin_layout Itemize
29720 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889302
29723 Biblatex (natbib mode)
29730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29733 natbib compatibility mode
29734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29738 This is a specific variant that is aimed at users who switch an existing
29743 (see below) or want to emulate
29747 behavior very closely.
29752 , this option has some additional styles.
29753 Style selection and option handling are identical.
29758 styles are also supported by this variant.
29761 \begin_layout Itemize
29763 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889321
29772 package which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29775 \begin_layout Itemize
29777 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891582
29786 package which provides citation styles particularly suited for the Humanities.
29791 \begin_layout Standard
29793 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891665
29802 furthermore provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29804 You have to select either of it in the dialog.
29809 case, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29811 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29812 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected style (however, when switching
29814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29829 , a suitable style is proposed).
29834 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29838 \begin_layout Standard
29840 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890338
29841 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29843 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890143
29845 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890144
29848 n the citation reference dialog
29849 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890163
29850 you can set a special citation format
29854 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891709
29855 Some selections also provide further options, such as the option to uppercase
29856 a name prefix such as
29857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29872 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29873 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29876 e., use or don't use
29877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29886 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890219
29887 For this feature you need to enable the option
29893 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29897 \begin_inset Index idx
29900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29901 Document ! Settings
29911 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
29912 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29913 style files as explained in
29914 the previous section.
29919 \begin_layout Standard
29921 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890476
29922 In the citation dialog,
29923 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890481
29925 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890482
29928 ou can also set text to appear
29929 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890531
29932 after a citation reference,
29933 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890545
29934 in the citation reference window
29935 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890583
29937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29941 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29943 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29959 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890682
29961 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890683
29964 example where the text
29965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29969 \begin_inset space ~
29973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29976 appears after the reference:
29979 \begin_layout Quote
29981 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29984 key "latexcompanion"
29990 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890690
29994 \begin_layout Standard
29996 \change_inserted -712698321 1501054733
29997 All styles except for
30001 also provide a means to add text that precedes the reference (such as
30002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30010 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
30014 \begin_layout Standard
30016 \change_inserted -712698321 1484998495
30017 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
30018 That is to say, if you refer to multiple references at one, the prenote
30019 will precede the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the
30025 styles allow for adding pre- and postnotes to any individual reference
30026 in a multi-citation (so-called
30027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30030 qualified citation lists
30031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30037 If you use such a style, and if the current reference includes multiple
30039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30046 window will display three columns:
30047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30071 If you double-click on an item's
30072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30087 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
30089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30092 General text before
30093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30104 input widgets, you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
30109 \begin_layout Section
30111 \begin_inset Index idx
30114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30130 \begin_layout Standard
30131 An index entry is created if you use the menu
30133 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30135 \begin_inset space ~
30140 or the toolbar button
30147 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
30148 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
30149 by \SpecialChar LyX
30150 as the index entry.
30153 \begin_layout Standard
30154 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
30156 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30157 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30159 \begin_inset space ~
30165 A light blue box labeled
30166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30177 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
30178 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
30182 \begin_layout Standard
30183 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
30184 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30185 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
30186 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30188 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30190 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
30198 \begin_layout Subsection
30199 Grouping Index Entries
30200 \begin_inset Index idx
30203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30212 \begin_layout Standard
30213 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30215 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30216 lists under the entry
30217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30225 First we create the entry
30226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30234 \begin_inset space ~
30238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30240 reference "subsec:Lists"
30245 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30246 \begin_inset space ~
30250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30252 reference "sec:Itemize"
30256 , we insert the command
30259 \begin_layout Standard
30265 \begin_layout Standard
30269 \begin_layout Standard
30275 \begin_layout Standard
30276 for the enumerated list in section
30277 \begin_inset space ~
30281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30283 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30290 \begin_layout Standard
30291 The exclamation mark
30292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30299 marks the grouping levels.
30300 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30301 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30302 If we don't have an index entry for
30303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30310 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30313 \begin_layout Subsection
30315 \begin_inset Index idx
30318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30319 Index ! Page ranges
30327 \begin_layout Standard
30328 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30330 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30331 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30332 an index entry in section
30333 \begin_inset space ~
30337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30339 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30346 \begin_layout Standard
30349 Paragraph environments|(
30352 \begin_layout Standard
30353 and another entry at the end of section
30354 \begin_inset space ~
30358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30360 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30367 \begin_layout Standard
30370 Paragraph environments|)
30373 \begin_layout Standard
30375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30398 respectively start and end the index range.
30399 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30400 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30401 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30402 An example is the index entry
30403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30406 Document ! Settings
30407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30413 \begin_layout Subsection
30415 \begin_inset Index idx
30418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30419 Index ! Cross referencing
30427 \begin_layout Standard
30428 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30429 We referred for example in the index entry
30430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30438 \begin_inset space ~
30442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30444 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30448 ) to the index entry
30449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30456 in the same section using the entry
30459 \begin_layout Standard
30462 GIF|see{Image formats}
30465 \begin_layout Standard
30466 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30468 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30469 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30472 \begin_layout Subsection
30474 \begin_inset Index idx
30477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30478 Index ! Entry order
30486 \begin_layout Standard
30487 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30488 follow the rules for the index order.
30489 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30495 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30497 \begin_inset space ~
30501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30503 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30512 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30513 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30538 \begin_inset Index idx
30541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30542 Dummy entries ! maïs
30548 \begin_inset Index idx
30551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30552 Dummy entries ! maître
30558 \begin_inset Index idx
30561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30562 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30567 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30568 maïs, maison, maître.
30569 To achieve this, we use the command
30572 \begin_layout Standard
30575 previous entry@current entry
30578 \begin_layout Standard
30579 In our case we want to have
30580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30595 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30598 \begin_layout Standard
30604 \begin_layout Standard
30605 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30606 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30608 See the next subsection for an example.
30611 \begin_layout Standard
30612 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30618 \begin_layout Standard
30619 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
30624 to generate the index (see section
30625 \begin_inset space ~
30629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30631 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30640 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30641 -package aeguill in section
30642 \begin_inset space ~
30646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30648 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
30652 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
30653 -packages although all these index
30654 commands start with
30655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30668 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
30673 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
30676 \begin_layout Standard
30688 \begin_layout Standard
30700 \begin_layout Subsection
30702 \begin_inset Index idx
30705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30706 Index ! Entry layout
30714 \begin_layout Standard
30715 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30716 \begin_inset Index idx
30719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30722 This is an italic dummy entry
30727 You can also format the page number using the character
30728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30735 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30736 -command without a backslash.
30737 We can write for example
30740 \begin_layout Standard
30743 italic page number:|textit
30746 \begin_layout Standard
30747 to get the page number in italic.
30748 \begin_inset Index idx
30751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30752 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30757 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30758 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30776 \begin_inset space ~
30782 Have a look at section
30783 \begin_inset space ~
30787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30789 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30793 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30797 \begin_layout Standard
30798 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30806 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30810 to generate the index, see section
30811 \begin_inset space ~
30815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30817 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30826 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30831 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30832 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30835 key "latexcompanion"
30848 \begin_layout Standard
30849 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30851 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30852 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30853 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30854 If so, put the following in the preamble
30857 \begin_layout Standard
30869 \begin_layout Standard
30873 \begin_layout Standard
30879 \begin_layout Standard
30880 in the index entry.
30881 \begin_inset Index idx
30884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30885 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30890 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30891 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30892 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30895 \begin_layout Standard
30896 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30897 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30898 a bold font for all index entries.
30899 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30911 documentation for details,
30912 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30914 key "makeindex,xindy"
30922 \begin_layout Subsection
30924 \begin_inset Index idx
30927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30936 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30943 \begin_layout Standard
30944 If the index generation program
30948 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30949 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30953 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30954 distribution, is used.
30958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30963 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30964 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30965 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30966 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30967 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30977 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30979 dialog, see section
30980 \begin_inset space ~
30984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30986 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30991 The available options are listed and explained in
30992 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30994 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
31000 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
31004 \begin_layout Standard
31005 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
31006 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
31009 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31010 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31014 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
31015 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
31018 \begin_layout Subsection
31022 \begin_layout Standard
31023 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
31024 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
31025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31032 next to the standard index.
31034 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
31035 that add this feature.
31042 \begin_inset Index idx
31045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31047 -packages ! splitidx
31052 package to generate multiple indexes.
31053 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
31058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31059 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
31061 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31069 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31070 style, but it also includes
31071 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
31072 Please consult the package's manual for details.
31080 \begin_layout Standard
31081 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
31082 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
31084 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31085 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31088 and select the option
31090 Use multiple Indexes
31097 already contains the standard index
31098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31106 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
31107 also appear as a heading) to the
31111 input field and press the
31116 The new index now also appears in the list.
31117 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
31118 label color to the new index.
31121 \begin_layout Standard
31122 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
31125 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31132 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
31133 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
31134 are additional features:
31137 \begin_layout Itemize
31138 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
31139 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
31142 \begin_layout Itemize
31143 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
31144 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
31145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31152 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
31153 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
31154 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
31155 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
31158 \begin_layout Section
31159 Nomenclature/Glossary
31160 \begin_inset Index idx
31163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31170 \begin_inset Index idx
31173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31202 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31204 name "sec:Nomenclature"
31211 \begin_layout Standard
31212 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
31213 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
31214 called nomenclature or glossary.
31217 \begin_layout Standard
31218 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31225 \begin_inset Index idx
31228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31230 -packages ! nomencl
31236 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31238 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31245 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31249 \begin_layout Standard
31250 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
31251 and then use the menu
31253 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31259 \begin_inset space ~
31264 or the toolbar button
31267 arg "nomencl-insert"
31272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31283 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
31286 \begin_layout Standard
31287 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
31288 The first is the term or
31292 that you wish to define.
31297 of the term or symbol.
31300 \begin_layout Standard
31301 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31309 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
31310 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
31318 \begin_layout Subsection
31319 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31320 \begin_inset Index idx
31323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31324 Nomenclature ! Layout
31332 \begin_layout Standard
31333 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31337 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31344 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31352 \begin_inset Newline newline
31360 \begin_inset Newline newline
31366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31373 character starts/ends the formula.
31374 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31375 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31387 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31397 \begin_layout Standard
31398 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31399 -syntax is given in section
31400 \begin_inset space ~
31404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31406 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31413 \begin_layout Standard
31417 \begin_inset space ~
31422 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31424 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31429 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31436 in this document is:
31437 \begin_inset Newline newline
31442 dummy entry for the character
31447 \begin_inset Newline newline
31459 \begin_inset space ~
31469 font use the command
31498 \begin_layout Standard
31499 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31504 \begin_inset space \space{}
31508 \begin_inset Newline newline
31524 \begin_inset Newline newline
31527 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31528 This command will make the font of all symbols
31535 \begin_inset space ~
31543 \begin_layout Standard
31544 If the characters |
31545 \begin_inset space \space{}
31549 \begin_inset space \space{}
31553 \begin_inset space \space{}
31557 \begin_inset space \space{}
31561 \begin_inset space \space{}
31564 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31565 a quote character in front of them.
31566 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31567 LatexCommand nomenclature
31568 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31569 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
31577 \begin_layout Subsection
31578 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31579 \begin_inset Index idx
31582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31583 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31591 \begin_layout Standard
31592 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31593 -code of the symbol
31595 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31597 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31600 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31601 LatexCommand nomenclature
31603 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31611 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31615 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31616 LatexCommand nomenclature
31619 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31625 They will be sorted by
31626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31652 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31655 will be sorted before the
31659 since the character
31660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31667 is considered in sorting.
31670 \begin_layout Standard
31671 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31674 \begin_inset space ~
31679 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31680 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31682 For the example given, you can insert
31686 in this field for the
31687 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31694 will be located before
31695 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31701 \begin_layout Standard
31702 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31707 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31717 \begin_layout Subsection
31718 Nomenclature Options
31719 \begin_inset Index idx
31722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31723 Nomenclature ! Options
31731 \begin_layout Standard
31736 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31737 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31740 \begin_layout Description
31741 refeq Appends the phrase
31742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31757 to every nomenclature entry, where
31763 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31766 \begin_layout Description
31767 refpage Appends the phrase
31768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31783 to every nomenclature entry, where
31789 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31792 \begin_layout Description
31793 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31796 \begin_layout Standard
31797 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31798 class options list in the
31800 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31804 In this document the options
31811 \begin_layout Standard
31812 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31818 \begin_layout Standard
31819 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31820 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31825 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31828 \begin_layout Description
31838 \begin_layout Description
31841 nomrefpage Like the
31848 \begin_layout Description
31851 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31860 \begin_layout Description
31864 \begin_inset space ~
31870 \begin_inset space ~
31875 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31878 \begin_layout Standard
31880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31887 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31888 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31892 \begin_layout Standard
31900 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31903 \begin_inset Newline newline
31910 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31915 \begin_inset Newline newline
31919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31934 by their translation.
31937 \begin_layout Subsection
31938 Printing the Nomenclature
31939 \begin_inset Index idx
31942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31943 Nomenclature ! Printing
31951 \begin_layout Standard
31952 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31954 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31955 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31971 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31972 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31973 You can choose between these settings:
31976 \begin_layout Description
31977 Default a space of 1
31978 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31984 \begin_layout Description
31986 \begin_inset space ~
31990 \begin_inset space ~
31993 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31996 \begin_layout Description
31997 Custom custom space
32000 \begin_layout Standard
32001 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
32002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32010 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
32018 For example, in order to change the name to
32022 , add the following line to the preamble:
32025 \begin_layout Standard
32033 nomname}{List of Symbols}
32036 \begin_layout Subsection
32037 Nomenclature Program
32038 \begin_inset Index idx
32041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32042 Nomenclature ! Program
32048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32050 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
32057 \begin_layout Standard
32063 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32064 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
32066 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
32071 by adding options, see section
32072 \begin_inset space ~
32076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32078 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32083 The available options are listed and explained in
32084 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32086 key "nomencl,makeindex"
32094 \begin_layout Section
32096 \begin_inset Index idx
32099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32106 \begin_inset Index idx
32109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32110 Document ! Branches
32116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32118 name "sec:Branches"
32125 \begin_layout Standard
32126 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
32127 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
32128 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
32129 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
32132 \begin_layout Standard
32133 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
32134 allows you to put text into branches.
32135 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
32136 To create a branch, either select the menu
32138 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32139 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
32142 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
32144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32151 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
32152 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
32153 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
32154 and whether the name of the branch should
32155 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
32156 (see below for an example).
32157 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
32158 to the name of the other) and to add
32159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32171 \begin_inset space ~
32174 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32175 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32178 \begin_layout Standard
32179 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32180 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32182 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32185 where you can choose a branch.
32186 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32190 \begin_layout Standard
32191 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32192 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32195 \begin_layout Standard
32196 \begin_inset Branch Question
32200 \begin_layout Standard
32201 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32209 \begin_layout Standard
32210 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32214 \begin_layout Standard
32215 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32223 \begin_layout Standard
32230 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32231 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32234 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32235 Consider for example a file
32236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32243 which has the above branches.
32245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32252 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32276 branch were inactive,
32277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32292 branch was active, likewise
32293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32308 branch was active, and
32309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32312 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32316 if both branches were active.
32317 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32318 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296009
32322 \begin_layout Standard
32324 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
32325 As of LyX 2.3.0, there are also
32326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32333 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
32339 \begin_inset Branch Question
32343 \begin_layout Standard
32345 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296217
32346 For example, this material will only appear when the Question branch is
32354 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32355 To control whether a particular inset is
32356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32363 , right-click on the inset button and choose
32364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32370 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
32372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32376 \change_deleted 424524441 1468296150
32380 \begin_layout Standard
32381 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32387 \begin_layout Standard
32388 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32389 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32390 definitions for each branch.
32391 For example you can define for the question branch
32395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32396 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32397 -syntax, see section
32398 \begin_inset space ~
32402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32404 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32416 \begin_layout Standard
32426 \begin_layout Standard
32436 \begin_layout Standard
32437 and for the answer branch
32440 \begin_layout Standard
32450 \begin_layout Standard
32460 \begin_layout Standard
32461 \begin_inset Branch Question
32465 \begin_layout Standard
32469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32497 \begin_layout Standard
32498 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32502 \begin_layout Standard
32506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32534 \begin_layout Standard
32535 Now it is possible to use the
32539 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32546 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32549 commands to obtain conditional output.
32550 Here is an example formula where only the
32557 \begin_inset Formula
32559 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32567 \begin_layout Standard
32568 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32576 \begin_layout Standard
32577 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32579 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32583 \begin_inset space \space{}
32586 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32588 For this advanced usage, see the
32594 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32599 \begin_layout Section
32601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32603 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32608 \begin_inset Index idx
32611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32620 \begin_layout Standard
32623 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32624 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32627 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32629 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32635 \begin_inset Index idx
32638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32640 -packages ! hyperref
32645 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32646 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32647 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32648 part of the document.
32652 \begin_layout Standard
32653 The header information in the dialog tab
32657 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32658 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32659 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32660 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32664 \begin_inset space ~
32668 \begin_inset space ~
32673 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32674 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32675 and author entries.
32679 \begin_inset space ~
32683 \begin_inset space ~
32687 \begin_inset space ~
32692 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32695 \begin_layout Standard
32696 You can specify in the dialog tab
32700 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32705 \begin_inset space ~
32709 \begin_inset space ~
32713 \begin_inset space ~
32718 option allows long links to be split;
32721 \begin_inset space ~
32725 \begin_inset space ~
32729 \begin_inset space ~
32737 \begin_inset space ~
32742 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32745 \begin_inset space ~
32750 colors the different links.
32751 The default colors are:
32754 \begin_layout Labeling
32755 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32760 for hyperlinks and URLs
32763 \begin_layout Labeling
32764 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32772 \begin_layout Labeling
32773 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32781 \begin_layout Standard
32782 but you can change these in the field
32787 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32790 \begin_layout Standard
32793 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32796 \begin_layout Standard
32801 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32802 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32803 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32806 \begin_layout Standard
32811 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32812 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32813 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32823 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32824 when opening the PDF.
32826 \begin_inset space ~
32829 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32830 \begin_inset space ~
32833 1 will only display the sections.
32836 \begin_layout Standard
32837 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32838 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32844 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32845 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32855 \begin_layout Section
32857 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32861 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32868 \begin_layout Subsection
32871 \begin_inset Index idx
32874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32884 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32891 \begin_layout Standard
32892 As \SpecialChar LyX
32893 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32894 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32895 commands and constructs,
32898 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32899 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32900 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32901 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32902 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32903 cannot support all packages and
32907 \begin_layout Standard
32908 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32909 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32910 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32914 Code box is created by the menu
32916 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32918 \begin_inset space ~
32923 or by the toolbar button
32936 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32944 \begin_layout Standard
32945 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32947 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32949 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32954 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32959 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32966 , you can write the command part
32972 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32973 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32977 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32978 Code box behind the word.
32979 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32980 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32984 \begin_layout Standard
32985 \begin_inset Graphics
32986 filename clipart/ERT.png
32994 \begin_layout Standard
32998 \begin_layout Standard
32999 This is a line with a
33003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33026 \begin_layout Standard
33027 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33035 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33036 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
33037 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
33038 know that the command is finished.
33046 \begin_layout Subsection
33047 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33049 \begin_inset Argument 1
33052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33053 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33060 \begin_inset Index idx
33063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33071 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33073 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33080 \begin_layout Standard
33081 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
33082 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33083 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
33084 uses in the background.
33085 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
33086 is based on commands, you can
33087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33095 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
33096 any time if you know the right commands.
33097 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
33098 is the end of the day.
33099 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
33100 all caption labels bold.
33101 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
33103 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
33107 \begin_layout Standard
33108 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
33110 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33112 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33115 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33125 \begin_layout Standard
33126 As result you find that the package
33131 \begin_inset Index idx
33134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33136 -packages ! caption
33142 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
33144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33147 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33151 \begin_inset space ~
33159 \begin_layout Standard
33164 usepackage[options]{package name}
33167 \begin_layout Standard
33168 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
33169 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
33170 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
33171 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
33174 \begin_layout Standard
33175 In your case the package name is
33180 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33185 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33186 So you add the command
33189 \begin_layout Standard
33194 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33197 \begin_layout Standard
33198 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33203 For more commands provided by the
33207 package, have a look at its documentation,
33208 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33223 \begin_layout Standard
33224 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33226 For example if you use a
33230 class, you don't need the package
33234 , you can instead write
33237 \begin_layout Standard
33242 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33247 \begin_layout Standard
33248 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33249 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33250 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33257 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33260 \begin_layout Standard
33261 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33262 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33264 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33265 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33266 Code box as described in the previous
33270 \begin_layout Standard
33271 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33272 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33275 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33277 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33285 \begin_layout Standard
33286 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33292 \begin_layout Standard
33296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33306 \begin_inset Note Note
33309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33310 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33318 \begin_layout Left Header
33319 \begin_inset Argument 1
33322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33342 \begin_inset Note Note
33345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33346 defines the header line as described below
33354 \begin_layout Center Header
33355 \begin_inset Argument 1
33358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33367 \begin_layout Right Header
33368 \begin_inset Argument 1
33371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33392 \begin_layout Left Footer
33393 \begin_inset Argument 1
33396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33417 \begin_layout Center Footer
33418 \begin_inset Argument 1
33421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33433 \begin_inset Newline newline
33437 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33443 \begin_layout Right Footer
33444 \begin_inset Argument 1
33447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33469 \begin_layout Section
33470 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33473 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33478 \begin_inset Index idx
33481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33482 Document ! Header/Footer line
33488 \begin_inset Index idx
33491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33500 \begin_layout Standard
33501 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33505 \begin_inset space ~
33516 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33522 \begin_inset space ~
33528 As a second step add in the menu
33530 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33531 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33540 Custom Header/Footerlines
33543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33547 This module offers the following 6
33548 \begin_inset space ~
33554 \begin_layout Description
33556 \begin_inset space ~
33560 \begin_inset space ~
33564 \begin_inset space ~
33568 \begin_inset space ~
33572 \begin_inset space ~
33578 \begin_layout Description
33580 \begin_inset space ~
33584 \begin_inset space ~
33588 \begin_inset space ~
33592 \begin_inset space ~
33596 \begin_inset space ~
33602 \begin_layout Standard
33603 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33604 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33607 \begin_layout Standard
33608 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33609 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33611 \begin_inset space ~
33615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33617 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33621 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33624 \begin_layout Standard
33625 \begin_inset Float figure
33631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33634 \begin_inset Tabular
33635 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33636 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33637 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33638 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33639 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33641 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33659 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33670 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33688 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33699 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33703 The normal text on the page goes here.
33704 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33706 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33707 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33712 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33721 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33732 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33750 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33761 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33779 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33797 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33802 name "fig:Page-layout"
33806 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33819 \begin_layout Standard
33820 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33828 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33832 \begin_inset space ~
33837 is set to “Default”.
33838 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33847 \begin_layout Subsection
33851 \begin_layout Standard
33852 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33853 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33854 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33855 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33857 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33859 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33862 \begin_layout Standard
33863 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33864 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33868 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33870 \begin_inset space ~
33878 \begin_layout Description
33881 thepage prints the current page number
33884 \begin_layout Description
33887 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33890 \begin_layout Description
33893 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33896 \begin_layout Description
33899 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33900 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33907 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33910 because it usually goes in a left header.
33913 \begin_layout Description
33916 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33917 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33919 It is normally used in the right header.
33922 \begin_layout Subsection
33923 Default header/footer
33926 \begin_layout Standard
33927 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33928 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33929 footer has the page number.
33930 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33931 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33932 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33935 \begin_inset space ~
33943 \begin_layout Subsection
33947 \begin_layout Standard
33948 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33949 Some pages are different.
33950 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33951 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33952 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33953 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33954 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33957 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33958 Header and footer decoration line
33961 \begin_layout Standard
33962 By default, you get a 0.4
33963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33966 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33967 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33979 in the following way:
33982 \begin_layout Standard
33989 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33992 \begin_layout Standard
33993 where thickness is a size in standard units like
34006 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
34007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34013 \begin_layout Standard
34014 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34016 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
34017 \begin_inset space ~
34021 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34031 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34032 Several header/footer lines
34035 \begin_layout Standard
34036 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
34037 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
34038 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
34040 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34055 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34056 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34058 \begin_inset space ~
34066 \begin_layout Standard
34073 headheight}{height}
34076 \begin_layout Standard
34081 is a size in standard units (e.
34082 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34086 \begin_inset space \space{}
34094 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
34095 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
34096 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34097 logfile with the menu
34099 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34101 \begin_inset space ~
34109 \begin_inset space ~
34114 to see if you can find a warning about the package
34119 \begin_inset Index idx
34122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34124 -packages ! fancyhdr
34130 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
34131 for your header/footer.
34134 \begin_layout Subsection
34138 \begin_layout Standard
34139 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
34140 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
34141 This example consists of the following definition:
34144 \begin_layout Description
34146 \begin_inset space ~
34155 , empty optional argument
34158 \begin_layout Description
34160 \begin_inset space ~
34163 Header empty, empty optional argument
34166 \begin_layout Description
34168 \begin_inset space ~
34177 in the optional argument
34180 \begin_layout Description
34182 \begin_inset space ~
34191 in the optional argument
34194 \begin_layout Description
34196 \begin_inset space ~
34209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34213 \begin_inset Newline newline
34217 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34224 in the optional argument
34227 \begin_layout Description
34229 \begin_inset space ~
34238 , empty optional argument
34241 \begin_layout Description
34244 headrulewidth set to 2
34245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34251 \begin_layout Standard
34252 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34253 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34259 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34269 \begin_layout Standard
34270 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34276 \begin_layout Standard
34280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34284 pagestyle{headings}
34290 \begin_inset Note Note
34293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34294 switches back to page style with the default headings
34302 \begin_layout Section
34303 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34306 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34311 \begin_inset Index idx
34314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34321 \begin_inset Index idx
34324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34333 \begin_layout Standard
34335 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34336 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34337 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34340 \begin_layout Subsection
34344 \begin_layout Standard
34345 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34351 \begin_inset Index idx
34354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34356 -packages ! preview-latex
34361 (on some systems named simply
34366 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34368 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34375 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34377 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34385 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34386 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34387 -package are automatically
34388 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34392 \begin_layout Subsection
34396 \begin_layout Standard
34397 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34398 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34400 activate the option
34403 \begin_inset space ~
34410 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34416 \begin_inset space ~
34420 \begin_inset space ~
34423 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34430 \begin_inset space ~
34443 \begin_inset space ~
34448 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34451 \begin_layout Standard
34452 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34457 \begin_inset space ~
34465 \begin_inset space ~
34473 \begin_layout Standard
34474 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34475 and when you finish
34479 \begin_layout Standard
34480 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34488 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34489 generated by activating the option
34492 \begin_inset space ~
34498 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34506 \begin_layout Subsection
34507 Selected document parts
34510 \begin_layout Standard
34511 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34512 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34513 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34514 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34516 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34518 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34522 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34523 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34524 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34527 \begin_layout Standard
34528 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34535 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34547 is explained in section
34549 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34554 \begin_inset space ~
34564 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34565 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34566 the final rotated boxes,
34567 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34568 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34570 Here is the result:
34573 \begin_layout Standard
34574 \begin_inset Preview
34576 \begin_layout Standard
34581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34585 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34591 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34601 height_special "totalheight"
34606 backgroundcolor "none"
34609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34634 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34640 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34662 \begin_layout Standard
34663 Previewing works also for colors.
34664 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34683 is explained in section
34690 \begin_inset space ~
34703 \begin_layout Standard
34704 \begin_inset Preview
34706 \begin_layout Standard
34710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34729 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34734 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34753 \begin_layout Standard
34754 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34760 \begin_layout Standard
34761 If \SpecialChar LyX
34762 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34763 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34764 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34765 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34766 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34767 the \SpecialChar TeX
34769 If \SpecialChar LyX
34770 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34771 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34773 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34774 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34775 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34778 \begin_layout Subsection
34783 \begin_layout Standard
34784 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34785 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34788 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34790 \begin_inset space ~
34795 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34797 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34799 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34800 's main window, then only this selection
34801 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34802 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34803 the source view window.
34808 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34809 ; but note that if you have
34810 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34812 not just the one which is open at the time.
34815 \begin_layout Section
34816 Advanced Find and Replace
34817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34819 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34824 \begin_inset Index idx
34827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34834 \begin_inset Index idx
34837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34846 \begin_layout Subsection
34850 \begin_layout Standard
34851 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34852 allows for searching of complex,
34853 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34855 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34856 The key-features are:
34859 \begin_layout Itemize
34860 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34861 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34862 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34866 \begin_layout Itemize
34867 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34868 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34869 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34870 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34873 \begin_layout Itemize
34874 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34875 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34876 outside of mathematics environments
34879 \begin_layout Itemize
34880 Search may be widened to a specific
34885 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34889 \begin_inset space ~
34892 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34893 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34900 \begin_layout Itemize
34901 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34902 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34907 \begin_inset space ~
34910 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34913 \begin_layout Subsection
34917 \begin_layout Standard
34918 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34920 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34933 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34936 ) or the toolbar button
34939 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34945 Advanced Find and Replace
34950 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34954 \begin_layout Standard
34960 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34964 \begin_inset space ~
34969 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34972 arg "paragraph-break"
34976 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34977 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34981 arg "paragraph-break"
34984 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34988 searches backwards.
34991 \begin_layout Standard
34995 \begin_inset space ~
35000 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
35009 \begin_inset space ~
35014 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
35017 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35018 Searching for mathematics
35021 \begin_layout Standard
35022 Mathematical formulas, such as
35023 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
35026 or something more complex like
35027 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
35030 , may be searched for by typing them in the
35035 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
35036 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
35037 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
35038 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
35044 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35048 \begin_layout Standard
35049 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
35050 This is done by switching to the
35054 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
35059 This way, entering in the
35066 \begin_layout Itemize
35067 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
35068 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
35071 \begin_layout Itemize
35072 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
35073 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
35076 \begin_layout Itemize
35077 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
35078 of it only within section headings.
35079 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
35080 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
35084 \begin_layout Itemize
35085 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
35086 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
35089 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35093 \begin_layout Standard
35094 The entries made in the
35098 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
35101 \begin_inset space ~
35107 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
35111 button or alternatively press
35114 arg "paragraph-break"
35121 while the cursor is in the
35124 \begin_inset space ~
35132 \begin_layout Standard
35133 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
35135 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
35139 \begin_layout Itemize
35140 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
35141 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
35142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35149 with its typewriter version
35150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35164 \begin_layout Itemize
35165 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
35167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35171 \begin_inset Formula $R$
35175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35183 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35190 (you may want to enable the
35193 \begin_inset space ~
35201 \begin_inset space ~
35206 options and disable the
35214 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35222 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35223 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35227 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35230 , or occurrences of
35231 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35235 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35241 \begin_layout Subsection
35245 \begin_layout Standard
35246 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35251 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35253 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35255 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35265 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35271 This is done with the context menu
35273 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35274 Insert Regular Expression
35276 while the cursor is in the
35281 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35282 expression matching rules
35286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35287 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35294 \begin_inset space ~
35297 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35298 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35304 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35305 same text in the document.
35306 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35307 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35310 \begin_layout Enumerate
35311 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35316 editor the fraction
35317 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35321 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35324 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35325 fractions with the given denominator.
35328 \begin_layout Enumerate
35329 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35341 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35346 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35347 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35348 Also, by inserting a
35349 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35352 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35353 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35356 \begin_layout Standard
35357 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35358 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35359 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35362 , and referring back to them through
35363 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35367 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35371 For example, try searching with the regexp
35372 \begin_inset Newline newline
35375 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35378 \begin_inset Newline newline
35381 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35384 \begin_layout Standard
35385 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35388 \begin_layout Standard
35389 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35397 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35398 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35399 sub-expressions is absolute.
35401 \begin_inset space ~
35405 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35408 always refers to the first occurrence of
35409 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35412 in all entered regexps.
35420 \begin_layout Section
35422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35424 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35429 \begin_inset Index idx
35432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35441 \begin_layout Standard
35443 has a built-in spell checker.
35446 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35453 key or the toolbar button
35456 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35459 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35460 beginning of the currently selected text.
35461 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35462 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35463 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35464 scrolled so that it is visible.
35465 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35466 n, if any could be found.
35467 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35471 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35472 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35475 \begin_layout Standard
35476 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35479 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35483 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35484 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35486 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35487 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35490 \begin_inset space ~
35498 arg "dialog-show character"
35501 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35503 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35506 \begin_layout Standard
35507 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35508 can be downloaded from here:
35509 \begin_inset Newline newline
35513 \begin_inset Flex URL
35516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35518 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35524 \begin_inset Newline newline
35528 \begin_inset space ~
35531 files for each language.
35532 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35533 \begin_inset space ~
35536 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35537 's installation subfolder
35545 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35547 \begin_inset Newline newline
35550 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35551 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35552 but in most cases these are
35568 is the language code.
35571 \begin_layout Subsection
35575 \begin_layout Standard
35578 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35579 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35581 \begin_inset space ~
35584 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35587 you can set the following things:
35590 \begin_layout Description
35592 \begin_inset space ~
35595 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35596 should use for spell checking.
35597 Depending on your platform,
35611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35612 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35613 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35628 \begin_inset space ~
35631 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35634 \begin_layout Description
35636 \begin_inset space ~
35639 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35640 will always use the given language
35641 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35644 \begin_layout Description
35646 \begin_inset space ~
35649 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35651 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35655 \begin_inset space \space{}
35659 This should normally not be needed.
35662 \begin_layout Description
35664 \begin_inset space ~
35668 \begin_inset space ~
35671 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35683 \begin_layout Description
35685 \begin_inset space ~
35688 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35689 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35690 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35691 appear in a context menu.
35692 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35696 \begin_layout Description
35698 \begin_inset space ~
35702 \begin_inset space ~
35706 \begin_inset space ~
35709 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35713 \begin_layout Section
35715 \begin_inset Index idx
35718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35727 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35734 \begin_layout Standard
35736 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35737 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35747 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35749 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35759 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35761 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35762 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35763 which are available for many languages.
35766 \begin_layout Standard
35767 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35768 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35772 \begin_layout Subsection
35773 Setting up the thesaurus
35776 \begin_layout Standard
35785 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35789 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35794 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35796 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35800 \begin_inset space ~
35808 For instance, the US English files are named:
35811 \begin_layout Itemize
35815 \begin_layout Itemize
35819 \begin_layout Standard
35828 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35829 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35832 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35833 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35834 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35836 \begin_inset space ~
35841 ) to the path where they are installed.
35845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35846 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35847 ies, typical locations are
35853 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35857 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35861 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35864 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35870 LibreOffice-<Version>
35877 On the Mac, the default location is
35879 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35880 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35881 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35882 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35883 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35884 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35892 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35893 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35894 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35898 \begin_layout Standard
35899 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35900 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35904 \begin_layout Itemize
35905 \begin_inset Flex URL
35908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35910 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35918 \begin_layout Standard
35919 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35920 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35922 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35923 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35924 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35926 \begin_inset space ~
35931 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35933 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35934 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35938 \begin_layout Standard
35939 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35941 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35944 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35950 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35953 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35954 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35956 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35962 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35963 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35964 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35966 \begin_inset space ~
35971 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35974 \begin_layout Subsection
35975 Using the thesaurus
35978 \begin_layout Standard
35979 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35981 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35984 or the toolbar button
35987 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35990 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35992 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35994 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35995 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35996 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
36005 ), related terms (such as
36008 \begin_inset space ~
36017 ), compounds (such as
36020 \begin_inset space ~
36029 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
36038 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
36041 \begin_layout Standard
36042 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
36043 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
36047 \begin_layout Standard
36048 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
36049 the dictionary, such as the above
36053 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
36054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36058 \begin_inset space \space{}
36061 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
36062 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
36063 For example, looking up the word form
36067 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
36072 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
36073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36077 \begin_inset space \space{}
36088 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
36089 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
36090 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
36093 \begin_layout Section
36095 \begin_inset Index idx
36098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36105 \begin_inset Index idx
36108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36109 Document ! Change Tracking
36115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36117 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
36124 \begin_layout Standard
36125 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
36126 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
36127 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
36128 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
36130 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36132 \begin_inset space ~
36135 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36137 \begin_inset space ~
36145 \begin_layout Standard
36146 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
36160 The color depends on the author that made the change.
36161 You can change the color in
36163 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36164 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36166 \begin_inset space ~
36170 \begin_inset space ~
36175 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36181 \begin_inset Index idx
36184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36185 Color ! Change tracking
36190 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36191 's status bar when the
36192 cursor is in changed text.
36193 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36196 arg "changes-merge"
36202 \begin_layout Standard
36203 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36205 \begin_inset Index idx
36208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36217 \begin_layout Standard
36218 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36224 \begin_layout Standard
36225 \begin_inset Graphics
36226 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36234 \begin_layout Standard
36235 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36241 \begin_layout Standard
36242 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36245 \begin_layout Standard
36246 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36252 \begin_layout Standard
36253 \begin_inset Tabular
36254 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36255 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36256 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36257 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36258 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36267 arg "changes-track"
36275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36281 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36283 \begin_inset space ~
36286 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36288 \begin_inset space ~
36297 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36306 arg "changes-output"
36314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36320 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36322 \begin_inset space ~
36325 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36327 \begin_inset space ~
36331 \begin_inset space ~
36335 \begin_inset space ~
36344 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36365 Jumps to the next change
36371 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36380 arg "change-accept"
36388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36394 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36396 \begin_inset space ~
36399 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36401 \begin_inset space ~
36410 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36419 arg "change-reject"
36427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36433 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36435 \begin_inset space ~
36438 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36440 \begin_inset space ~
36449 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36458 arg "changes-merge"
36466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36472 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36474 \begin_inset space ~
36477 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36479 \begin_inset space ~
36488 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36497 arg "all-changes-accept"
36505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36511 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36513 \begin_inset space ~
36516 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36518 \begin_inset space ~
36522 \begin_inset space ~
36531 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36540 arg "all-changes-reject"
36548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36554 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36556 \begin_inset space ~
36559 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36561 \begin_inset space ~
36565 \begin_inset space ~
36574 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36597 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36598 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36600 \begin_inset space ~
36609 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36632 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36634 \begin_inset space ~
36650 \begin_layout Standard
36651 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36657 \begin_layout Standard
36658 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36678 \begin_layout Standard
36679 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36680 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36681 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36682 the next change after the current cursor position.
36683 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36684 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36685 step to the next change.
36686 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36689 \begin_layout Standard
36690 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36691 to describe a change.
36694 \begin_layout Standard
36695 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36701 \begin_inset Index idx
36704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36706 -packages ! dvipost
36712 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36714 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36721 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36725 \begin_layout Section
36726 Comparison of Documents
36727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36729 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36734 \begin_inset Index idx
36737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36738 Comparison of documents
36746 \begin_layout Standard
36747 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36750 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36754 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36755 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36757 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36759 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36763 \begin_inset space ~
36767 \begin_inset space ~
36771 \begin_inset space ~
36780 \begin_inset space ~
36784 \begin_inset space ~
36788 \begin_inset space ~
36792 \begin_inset space ~
36796 \begin_inset space ~
36800 \begin_inset space ~
36805 enables the change tracking option
36808 \begin_inset space ~
36812 \begin_inset space ~
36816 \begin_inset space ~
36821 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36824 \begin_layout Section
36825 International Support
36826 \begin_inset Index idx
36829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36830 International support
36838 \begin_layout Standard
36839 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36840 with any language you want.
36841 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36842 up \SpecialChar LyX
36844 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36846 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36854 \begin_layout Standard
36855 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36856 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36857 \begin_inset space ~
36861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36863 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36870 \begin_layout Subsection
36872 \begin_inset Index idx
36875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36882 \begin_inset Index idx
36885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36886 Document ! Settings
36892 \begin_inset Index idx
36895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36896 Document ! Language
36904 \begin_layout Standard
36907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36908 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36911 dialog lets you set
36913 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36918 \begin_layout Standard
36923 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36928 \begin_inset space ~
36933 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36934 For details about the different encoding options see section
36935 \begin_inset space ~
36939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36941 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36948 \begin_layout Subsection
36949 Keyboard mapping configuration
36950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36952 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36959 \begin_layout Standard
36960 If you have for example a U.
36961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36964 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36965 can use an alternate keymap.
36966 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36971 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36972 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36973 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36976 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36977 \begin_inset space ~
36981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36983 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36988 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36989 which one you want to use.
36992 \begin_layout Standard
36993 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36994 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36995 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36996 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36999 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
37000 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
37001 one to support the characters you want.
37002 This and many other customizations are explained in the
37009 \begin_layout Chapter
37012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37014 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
37021 \begin_layout Standard
37022 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
37023 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
37024 topic inside the user's guide.
37027 \begin_layout Section
37029 \begin_inset Index idx
37032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37041 \begin_layout Standard
37046 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
37049 \begin_layout Subsection
37053 \begin_layout Standard
37054 Creates a new document.
37057 \begin_layout Subsection
37061 \begin_layout Standard
37062 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
37063 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
37064 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
37067 \begin_layout Subsection
37071 \begin_layout Standard
37075 \begin_layout Subsection
37079 \begin_layout Standard
37080 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
37081 Click there on a file to open it.
37084 \begin_layout Subsection
37088 \begin_layout Standard
37089 Closes the current document.
37092 \begin_layout Subsection
37096 \begin_layout Standard
37097 Closes all opened documents.
37100 \begin_layout Subsection
37104 \begin_layout Standard
37105 Saves the actual document.
37108 \begin_layout Subsection
37112 \begin_layout Standard
37113 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
37116 \begin_layout Subsection
37120 \begin_layout Standard
37121 Saves all opened documents.
37124 \begin_layout Subsection
37128 \begin_layout Standard
37129 Reloads the actual document from disk.
37132 \begin_layout Subsection
37136 \begin_layout Standard
37137 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
37138 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
37139 It is described in the section
37141 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
37146 Additional Features
37151 \begin_layout Subsection
37155 \begin_layout Standard
37156 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
37157 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
37159 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
37160 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
37164 \begin_layout Standard
37165 When using the menu entry
37168 \begin_inset space ~
37173 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37177 \begin_inset space ~
37181 \begin_inset space ~
37185 \begin_inset space ~
37190 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37191 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37194 \begin_layout Subsection
37196 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37198 name "subsec:Export"
37205 \begin_layout Standard
37206 You can export your document to various file formats.
37207 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37209 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37210 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37211 during its configuration.
37214 \begin_layout Standard
37215 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37217 \begin_inset space ~
37221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37223 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37230 \begin_layout Description
37236 \begin_inset space ~
37239 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37241 \begin_inset space ~
37244 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37245 \begin_inset Newline newline
37248 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37249 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37253 \begin_layout Description
37254 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37260 \begin_layout Description
37262 \begin_inset space ~
37265 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37271 \begin_layout Description
37272 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37273 's native DVI-format.
37274 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37275 files paths or file names in your document.
37277 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37284 \begin_layout Description
37285 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37286 in files paths or file names
37289 \begin_layout Description
37291 \begin_inset space ~
37298 ) DVI-format using the program
37300 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37303 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37307 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37315 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37323 \begin_layout Description
37325 \begin_inset space ~
37328 (cropped) the same as
37332 but with cropped page margins.
37335 \begin_layout Description
37337 \begin_inset space ~
37340 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37344 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37349 \begin_layout Description
37353 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37361 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37369 \begin_layout Description
37371 \begin_inset space ~
37375 \begin_inset space ~
37378 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37382 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37390 \begin_layout Description
37394 \begin_inset space ~
37403 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37404 source that is compilable with the program
37406 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37410 \begin_layout Description
37414 \begin_inset space ~
37419 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37420 source, additionally all images used in the document
37421 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37425 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37428 \begin_layout Description
37432 \begin_inset space ~
37437 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37438 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37439 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37447 \begin_layout Description
37451 \begin_inset space ~
37460 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37461 source that is compilable with the program
37467 \begin_layout Description
37469 \begin_inset space ~
37473 \begin_inset space ~
37480 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37481 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37487 \begin_layout Description
37489 \begin_inset space ~
37492 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37493 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37495 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37499 \begin_inset space \space{}
37504 \begin_inset space ~
37508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37523 represent the version number)
37526 \begin_layout Description
37528 \begin_inset space ~
37532 \begin_inset space ~
37535 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37536 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37537 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37541 \begin_layout Description
37542 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37543 's internal XHTML engine
37546 \begin_layout Description
37548 \begin_inset space ~
37552 \begin_inset space ~
37556 \begin_inset space ~
37560 \begin_inset space ~
37563 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37568 For the conversion the program
37577 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37580 \begin_layout Description
37581 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37586 \begin_layout Description
37588 \begin_inset space ~
37591 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37593 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37596 For the conversion the program
37605 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37608 \begin_layout Description
37610 \begin_inset space ~
37613 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37614 For the conversion the program
37623 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37626 \begin_layout Description
37628 \begin_inset space ~
37631 (cropped) the same as
37634 \begin_inset space ~
37639 but with cropped page margins
37642 \begin_layout Description
37646 \begin_inset space ~
37651 PDF-format using the program
37655 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37658 \begin_layout Description
37662 \begin_inset space ~
37666 \begin_inset space ~
37674 \begin_inset space ~
37679 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37680 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37684 \begin_inset space \space{}
37687 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37691 \begin_layout Description
37695 \begin_inset space ~
37700 PDF-format using the program
37702 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37705 , produces PDF-files directly
37708 \begin_layout Description
37712 \begin_inset space ~
37717 PDF-format using the program
37721 , produces PDF-files directly
37724 \begin_layout Description
37728 \begin_inset space ~
37733 PDF-format using the program
37737 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37740 \begin_layout Description
37744 \begin_inset space ~
37749 PDF-format using the program
37754 , produces PDF-files directly
37757 \begin_layout Description
37761 \begin_inset space ~
37769 \begin_layout Description
37773 \begin_inset space ~
37777 \begin_inset space ~
37782 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37783 and then exported as text using the program
37788 \begin_layout Description
37793 PostScript format using the program
37801 options see section
37802 \begin_inset space ~
37806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37808 reference "subsec:General-output"
37815 \begin_layout Description
37816 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37817 source and also code in the statistical programming
37831 it is possible to use
37835 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37839 \begin_layout Standard
37840 If one of the menu entries
37847 \begin_inset space ~
37856 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37858 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37860 \begin_inset space ~
37864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37866 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37871 \begin_inset Index idx
37874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37875 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37884 \begin_layout Subsection
37888 \begin_layout Standard
37889 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37890 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37893 \begin_inset space ~
37897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37899 reference "sec:Paths"
37904 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37913 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37914 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37915 's preferences as described in section
37916 \begin_inset space ~
37920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37922 reference "subsec:Converters"
37929 \begin_layout Subsection
37930 New and Close Window
37933 \begin_layout Standard
37934 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37938 \begin_layout Subsection
37942 \begin_layout Standard
37943 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37946 \begin_layout Section
37948 \begin_inset Index idx
37951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37960 \begin_layout Subsection
37964 \begin_layout Standard
37965 Described in section
37966 \begin_inset space ~
37970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37972 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37979 \begin_layout Subsection
37980 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37983 \begin_layout Standard
37984 Described in section
37985 \begin_inset space ~
37989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37991 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37998 \begin_layout Subsection
38002 \begin_layout Standard
38003 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
38004 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
38007 \begin_layout Subsection
38011 \begin_layout Standard
38012 Selects the whole document.
38015 \begin_layout Subsection
38016 Find & Replace (Quick)
38019 \begin_layout Standard
38020 Described in section
38021 \begin_inset space ~
38025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38027 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38034 \begin_layout Subsection
38035 Find & Replace (Advanced)
38038 \begin_layout Standard
38039 Described in section
38040 \begin_inset space ~
38044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38046 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
38053 \begin_layout Subsection
38054 Move Paragraph Up/Down
38057 \begin_layout Standard
38058 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
38062 \begin_layout Subsection
38066 \begin_layout Standard
38067 Described in section
38068 \begin_inset space ~
38072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38074 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
38081 \begin_layout Subsection
38083 \begin_inset Index idx
38086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38087 Paragraph ! Settings
38095 \begin_layout Standard
38096 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
38097 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
38101 \begin_layout Standard
38102 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
38103 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
38109 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38110 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38112 \begin_inset space ~
38120 \begin_layout Subsection
38121 Table and Rows & Columns
38124 \begin_layout Standard
38125 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
38126 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
38127 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
38130 \begin_layout Subsection
38134 \begin_layout Standard
38135 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
38136 It will dissolve this inset.
38137 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
38141 \begin_layout Subsection
38145 \begin_layout Standard
38146 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
38147 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
38150 \begin_layout Subsection
38151 Increase/Decrease List Depth
38154 \begin_layout Standard
38155 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
38157 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
38158 \begin_inset space ~
38162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38164 reference "sec:Nesting"
38169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38171 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38178 \begin_layout Subsection
38181 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
38184 \begin_layout Standard
38185 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
38186 nts of the same type.
38188 \begin_inset space ~
38192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38194 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
38198 for an explanation.
38201 \begin_layout Section
38203 \begin_inset Index idx
38206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38215 \begin_layout Standard
38216 At the bottom of the
38220 menu the opened documents are listed.
38223 \begin_layout Subsection
38224 Open/Close all Insets
38227 \begin_layout Standard
38228 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38231 \begin_layout Subsection
38232 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38235 \begin_layout Standard
38236 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38239 \begin_layout Standard
38240 Math macros are described in the
38247 \begin_layout Subsection
38251 \begin_layout Standard
38252 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38253 \begin_inset space ~
38257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38259 reference "sec:Navigating"
38264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38266 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38273 \begin_layout Subsection
38277 \begin_layout Standard
38278 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38280 \begin_inset space ~
38284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38286 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38293 \begin_layout Subsection
38297 \begin_layout Standard
38298 Opens a window showing console messages.
38299 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38304 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38305 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38306 is processing the document.
38309 \begin_layout Subsection
38311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38313 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38318 \begin_inset Index idx
38321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38330 \begin_layout Standard
38331 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
38332 All toolbars and the
38335 \begin_inset space ~
38340 can be turned on and off.
38345 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38357 \begin_inset space ~
38369 \begin_inset space ~
38374 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38378 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38385 \begin_layout Standard
38390 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38394 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38395 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38396 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38397 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38398 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38401 \begin_layout Standard
38403 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38404 \begin_inset space ~
38408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38410 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38417 \begin_layout Subsection
38421 \begin_layout Standard
38425 \begin_inset space ~
38429 \begin_inset space ~
38433 \begin_inset space ~
38437 \begin_inset space ~
38441 \begin_inset space ~
38445 \begin_inset space ~
38450 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38451 's main window vertically while
38454 \begin_inset space ~
38458 \begin_inset space ~
38462 \begin_inset space ~
38466 \begin_inset space ~
38470 \begin_inset space ~
38474 \begin_inset space ~
38479 will split it horizontally.
38480 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38481 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38482 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38483 three or more documents at the same time.
38484 To close a split view, use the menu
38487 \begin_inset space ~
38491 \begin_inset space ~
38499 \begin_layout Subsection
38503 \begin_layout Standard
38504 Closes a split view.
38507 \begin_layout Subsection
38511 \begin_layout Standard
38512 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38513 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38514 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38515 's main window fullscreen.
38516 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38517 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38520 \begin_layout Section
38522 \begin_inset Index idx
38525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38534 \begin_layout Subsection
38538 \begin_layout Standard
38539 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38540 \begin_inset space ~
38544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38546 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38557 \begin_layout Subsection
38559 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38561 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38568 \begin_layout Standard
38569 Here you can insert the following characters:
38572 \begin_layout Description
38577 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38580 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38581 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38582 -packages you have installed.
38583 You can get a complete display by checking
38586 \begin_inset space ~
38592 \begin_inset Newline newline
38596 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38604 Not all characters will be visible in the
38608 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38609 dialog (see section
38610 \begin_inset space ~
38614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38616 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38620 ) can display every character.
38628 \begin_layout Description
38629 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38633 \begin_layout Description
38635 \begin_inset space ~
38639 \begin_inset space ~
38642 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38643 \begin_inset space ~
38647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38649 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38656 \begin_layout Description
38658 \begin_inset space ~
38661 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38664 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38665 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38671 \begin_layout Description
38673 \begin_inset space ~
38676 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38679 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38680 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38686 \begin_layout Description
38688 \begin_inset space ~
38691 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38695 \begin_layout Description
38697 \begin_inset space ~
38700 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38704 \begin_layout Description
38706 \begin_inset space ~
38709 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38715 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38721 \begin_layout Description
38723 \begin_inset space ~
38726 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38730 \begin_layout Description
38732 \begin_inset space ~
38736 \begin_inset Index idx
38739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38746 \begin_inset Index idx
38749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38750 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38755 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38756 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38758 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38764 \begin_inset Index idx
38767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38775 \begin_inset Newline newline
38778 More information about this feature can be found in the
38784 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38790 \begin_layout Description
38791 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38793 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38794 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38798 \begin_layout Subsection
38802 \begin_layout Standard
38803 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38806 \begin_layout Description
38807 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38808 \begin_inset script superscript
38810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38819 \begin_layout Description
38820 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38821 \begin_inset script subscript
38823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38832 \begin_layout Description
38834 \begin_inset space ~
38837 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38838 \begin_inset space ~
38842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38844 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38851 \begin_layout Description
38853 \begin_inset space ~
38856 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38857 \begin_inset space ~
38861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38863 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38870 \begin_layout Description
38872 \begin_inset space ~
38875 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38876 \begin_inset space ~
38880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38882 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38889 \begin_layout Description
38891 \begin_inset space ~
38894 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38896 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38900 \begin_inset space \space{}
38903 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38904 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38913 To insert a fraction use the command
38918 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38922 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38931 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38938 \begin_layout Description
38940 \begin_inset space ~
38943 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38944 \begin_inset space ~
38948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38950 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38957 \begin_layout Description
38959 \begin_inset space ~
38962 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38963 \begin_inset space ~
38967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38969 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38976 \begin_layout Description
38978 \begin_inset space ~
38981 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38982 \begin_inset space ~
38986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38988 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38995 \begin_layout Description
38996 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38997 \begin_inset space ~
39001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39003 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
39010 \begin_layout Description
39012 \begin_inset space ~
39015 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
39016 \begin_inset space ~
39020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39022 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
39029 \begin_layout Description
39031 \begin_inset space ~
39034 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
39035 \begin_inset space ~
39039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39041 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
39048 \begin_layout Description
39050 \begin_inset space ~
39054 \begin_inset space ~
39057 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
39058 \begin_inset space ~
39062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39064 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39071 \begin_layout Description
39073 \begin_inset space ~
39076 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
39077 as described in section
39078 \begin_inset space ~
39082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39084 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39091 \begin_layout Description
39093 \begin_inset space ~
39096 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
39097 \begin_inset space ~
39101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39103 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39110 \begin_layout Description
39112 \begin_inset space ~
39115 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
39116 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
39118 \begin_inset space ~
39122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39124 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39131 \begin_layout Description
39133 \begin_inset space ~
39136 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
39137 \begin_inset space ~
39141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39143 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39150 \begin_layout Description
39152 \begin_inset space ~
39156 \begin_inset space ~
39159 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39160 \begin_inset space ~
39164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39166 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39173 \begin_layout Subsection
39177 \begin_layout Standard
39178 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39182 \begin_inset space ~
39203 are described in section
39204 \begin_inset space ~
39208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39210 reference "sec:toc"
39219 is described in section
39220 \begin_inset space ~
39224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39226 reference "sec:Index"
39234 is described in section
39235 \begin_inset space ~
39239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39241 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39247 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39250 is described in section
39251 \begin_inset space ~
39255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39257 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39264 \begin_layout Subsection
39268 \begin_layout Standard
39269 To insert floats, as described in section
39270 \begin_inset space ~
39274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39276 reference "sec:Floats"
39280 and in detail the chapter
39287 \begin_inset space ~
39295 \begin_layout Subsection
39299 \begin_layout Standard
39300 To insert notes, described in section
39301 \begin_inset space ~
39305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39307 reference "sec:Notes"
39314 \begin_layout Subsection
39318 \begin_layout Standard
39319 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39321 Branches are described in section
39322 \begin_inset space ~
39326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39328 reference "sec:Branches"
39335 \begin_layout Subsection
39339 \begin_layout Standard
39340 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39341 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39343 An example is the document class
39344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39351 with three custom insets.
39354 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39358 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39364 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39367 \begin_layout Subsection
39369 \begin_inset Index idx
39372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39381 \begin_layout Standard
39382 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39384 For more information see chapter
39386 External Document Parts
39389 \begin_inset space ~
39395 \begin_layout Subsection
39397 \begin_inset Index idx
39400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39409 \begin_layout Standard
39410 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39411 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39418 \begin_inset space ~
39426 \begin_layout Subsection
39430 \begin_layout Standard
39435 dialog as described in section
39436 \begin_inset space ~
39440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39442 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39449 \begin_layout Subsection
39453 \begin_layout Standard
39458 as described in section
39459 \begin_inset space ~
39463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39465 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39472 \begin_layout Subsection
39476 \begin_layout Standard
39481 as described in section
39482 \begin_inset space ~
39486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39488 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39495 \begin_layout Subsection
39497 \begin_inset Index idx
39500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39507 \begin_inset Index idx
39510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39511 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39519 \begin_layout Standard
39520 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39521 Floats are described in section
39522 \begin_inset space ~
39526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39528 reference "sec:Floats"
39532 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39534 Multi-page Captions
39539 \begin_inset space ~
39547 \begin_layout Subsection
39551 \begin_layout Standard
39552 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39553 \begin_inset space ~
39557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39559 reference "sec:Index"
39566 \begin_layout Subsection
39570 \begin_layout Standard
39571 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39572 \begin_inset space ~
39576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39578 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39585 \begin_layout Subsection
39589 \begin_layout Standard
39590 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39591 Tables are described in section
39592 \begin_inset space ~
39596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39598 reference "sec:Tables"
39602 and in detail in the chapter
39609 \begin_inset space ~
39617 \begin_layout Subsection
39621 \begin_layout Standard
39627 Graphics are described in section
39628 \begin_inset space ~
39632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39634 reference "sec:Graphics"
39641 \begin_layout Subsection
39645 \begin_layout Standard
39646 Inserts a URL as described in section
39647 \begin_inset space ~
39651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39653 reference "subsec:URLs"
39660 \begin_layout Subsection
39664 \begin_layout Standard
39665 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39666 \begin_inset space ~
39670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39672 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39679 \begin_layout Subsection
39683 \begin_layout Standard
39684 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39685 \begin_inset space ~
39689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39691 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39698 \begin_layout Subsection
39702 \begin_layout Standard
39703 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39704 \begin_inset space ~
39708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39710 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39717 \begin_layout Subsection
39721 \begin_layout Standard
39722 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39723 title or caption of a float.
39724 Inserts a short title as described in section
39725 \begin_inset space ~
39729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39731 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39738 \begin_layout Subsection
39743 \begin_layout Standard
39744 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39745 Code box as described in section
39746 \begin_inset space ~
39750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39752 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39759 \begin_layout Subsection
39761 \begin_inset Index idx
39764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39773 \begin_layout Standard
39774 Inserts a program listings box.
39775 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39777 Program Code Listings
39782 \begin_inset space ~
39790 \begin_layout Subsection
39794 \begin_layout Standard
39795 Inserts the actual date.
39796 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39800 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
39808 \begin_inset space ~
39816 \begin_layout Subsection
39820 \begin_layout Standard
39821 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39822 \begin_inset space ~
39826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39828 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39835 \begin_layout Section
39837 \begin_inset Index idx
39840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39849 \begin_layout Standard
39850 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39851 \begin_inset space ~
39854 of the current document.
39855 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39858 \begin_layout Subsection
39862 \begin_layout Standard
39863 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39864 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39865 to jump, for example, between section
39866 \begin_inset space ~
39870 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39871 \begin_inset space ~
39874 2.5 and use the submenu
39877 \begin_inset space ~
39881 \begin_inset space ~
39888 \begin_inset space ~
39894 \begin_inset space ~
39898 \begin_inset space ~
39904 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39908 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39914 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39917 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39920 \begin_layout Standard
39921 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39925 \begin_inset space ~
39930 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39933 \begin_inset space ~
39938 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39941 \begin_layout Subsection
39942 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39945 \begin_layout Standard
39946 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39950 \begin_layout Subsection
39954 \begin_layout Standard
39955 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39956 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39957 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39961 \begin_inset space ~
39965 \begin_inset space ~
39973 \begin_layout Subsection
39977 \begin_layout Standard
39978 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39981 The \SpecialChar LyX
39982 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39984 \begin_inset space ~
39992 \begin_inset space ~
39997 manual for a detailed description.
40000 \begin_layout Section
40002 \begin_inset Index idx
40005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40014 \begin_layout Subsection
40018 \begin_layout Standard
40019 Change Tracking is described in section
40020 \begin_inset space ~
40024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40026 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40033 \begin_layout Subsection
40041 \begin_layout Standard
40042 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
40043 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
40044 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40046 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
40047 to the clipboard or update the view.
40048 \begin_inset Newline newline
40051 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40055 \begin_layout Standard
40058 Open Containing Directory
40060 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
40061 's temporary folder for the document.
40062 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
40063 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
40064 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
40065 For example some journals require to send the
40069 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40073 \begin_layout Subsection
40074 Start Appendix Here
40077 \begin_layout Standard
40078 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
40079 as described in section
40080 \begin_inset space ~
40084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40086 reference "sec:Appendices"
40093 \begin_layout Subsection
40095 \begin_inset space ~
40101 \begin_layout Standard
40102 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
40103 default output format for the document (menu
40105 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40106 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40107 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40109 \begin_inset space ~
40113 \begin_inset space ~
40119 \begin_inset space ~
40123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40125 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40129 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
40132 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40133 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40135 \begin_inset space ~
40138 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40140 \begin_inset space ~
40143 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40145 \begin_inset space ~
40149 \begin_inset space ~
40155 \begin_inset space ~
40159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40161 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40165 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40166 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40168 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40169 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40171 \begin_inset space ~
40174 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40176 \begin_inset space ~
40179 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40183 \begin_inset space ~
40187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40189 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40194 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40195 when it is first configured.
40196 The default output format is
40199 \begin_inset space ~
40207 \begin_layout Subsection
40208 View (Other Formats)
40211 \begin_layout Standard
40212 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40213 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40214 actual document with an external program.
40215 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40216 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40217 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40219 All possible formats are listed in section
40220 \begin_inset space ~
40224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40226 reference "subsec:Export"
40231 You should at least see the menu entry
40236 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40238 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40240 \begin_inset space ~
40244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40246 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40251 \begin_inset Index idx
40254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40255 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40264 \begin_layout Standard
40265 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40266 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40268 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40269 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40271 \begin_inset space ~
40274 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40276 \begin_inset space ~
40279 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40283 \begin_inset space ~
40287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40289 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40294 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40295 when it is first configured.
40298 \begin_layout Subsection
40300 \begin_inset space ~
40306 \begin_layout Standard
40307 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40308 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40311 \begin_layout Subsection
40312 Update (Other Formats)
40315 \begin_layout Standard
40316 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40317 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40320 \begin_layout Subsection
40321 View Master Document
40324 \begin_layout Standard
40325 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40341 \begin_inset space ~
40346 manual for more information on this topic).
40347 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40348 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40352 \begin_inset space ~
40356 \begin_inset space ~
40361 generates the output of the whole book, while
40365 will just output the chapter alone.
40368 \begin_layout Standard
40369 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40370 in the document settings (menu
40372 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40373 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40374 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40376 \begin_inset space ~
40380 \begin_inset space ~
40386 \begin_inset space ~
40390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40392 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40396 ) or in the preferences (menu
40398 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40399 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40401 \begin_inset space ~
40404 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40406 \begin_inset space ~
40409 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40411 \begin_inset space ~
40415 \begin_inset space ~
40421 \begin_inset space ~
40425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40427 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40434 \begin_layout Subsection
40435 Update Master Document
40438 \begin_layout Standard
40439 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40455 \begin_inset space ~
40460 manual for more information on this topic).
40461 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40462 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40465 \begin_layout Standard
40466 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40467 in the document settings (menu
40469 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40470 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40471 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40473 \begin_inset space ~
40477 \begin_inset space ~
40483 \begin_inset space ~
40487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40489 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40493 ) or in the preferences (menu
40495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40496 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40498 \begin_inset space ~
40501 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40503 \begin_inset space ~
40506 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40508 \begin_inset space ~
40512 \begin_inset space ~
40518 \begin_inset space ~
40522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40524 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40531 \begin_layout Subsection
40533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40535 name "subsec:Compressed"
40542 \begin_layout Standard
40543 Un/compresses the current document.
40544 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40545 compression (see the
40547 Additional Features
40549 manual for details).
40552 \begin_layout Subsection
40556 \begin_layout Standard
40557 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40560 \begin_layout Subsection
40564 \begin_layout Standard
40565 The document settings are described in appendix
40566 \begin_inset space ~
40570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40572 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40579 \begin_layout Section
40581 \begin_inset Index idx
40584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40593 \begin_layout Subsection
40597 \begin_layout Standard
40598 Spell checking is explained in section
40599 \begin_inset space ~
40603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40605 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40612 \begin_layout Subsection
40616 \begin_layout Standard
40617 The thesaurus is described in section
40618 \begin_inset space ~
40622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40624 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40631 \begin_layout Subsection
40633 \begin_inset Index idx
40636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40643 \begin_inset Index idx
40646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40655 \begin_layout Standard
40656 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40657 the highlighted document part.
40660 \begin_layout Subsection
40666 \begin_inset Index idx
40669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40670 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40679 \begin_layout Standard
40680 Generates with the help of the program
40682 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40685 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40686 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40687 This feature is not available on Windows.
40690 \begin_layout Subsection
40696 \begin_inset Index idx
40699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40709 \begin_layout Standard
40710 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40715 \begin_inset space ~
40720 to see the full filename paths.
40723 \begin_layout Subsection
40725 \begin_inset Index idx
40728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40737 \begin_layout Standard
40738 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40739 files as described in section
40740 \begin_inset space ~
40744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40746 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40753 \begin_layout Subsection
40755 \begin_inset Index idx
40758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40771 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40789 \begin_inset Index idx
40792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40793 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40802 \begin_layout Standard
40803 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40804 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40805 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40806 -packages and programs it needs; see
40808 \begin_inset space ~
40812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40814 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40821 \begin_layout Subsection
40825 \begin_layout Standard
40830 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40831 \begin_inset space ~
40835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40837 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40844 \begin_layout Section
40846 \begin_inset Index idx
40849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40858 \begin_layout Standard
40859 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40860 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40862 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40866 \begin_layout Standard
40870 \begin_inset space ~
40875 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40876 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40877 packages and classes found
40878 by \SpecialChar LyX
40880 \begin_inset space ~
40884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40886 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40893 \begin_layout Standard
40897 \begin_inset space ~
40902 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40907 \begin_layout Section
40909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40911 name "sec:Toolbars"
40918 \begin_layout Standard
40919 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40920 \begin_inset space ~
40924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40926 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40933 \begin_layout Standard
40934 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40935 This is described in the
40937 Additional Features
40942 \begin_layout Subsection
40944 \begin_inset Index idx
40947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40956 \begin_layout Standard
40957 \begin_inset Graphics
40958 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40966 \begin_layout Standard
40967 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40973 \begin_layout Standard
40974 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40991 \begin_inset Note Note
40994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40995 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
41000 manual for more information.
41008 \begin_layout Standard
41009 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41015 \begin_layout Standard
41016 \begin_inset Tabular
41017 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
41018 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41019 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41020 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41026 \begin_inset Graphics
41027 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
41037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41041 pull-down box for the environments
41054 \begin_layout Standard
41055 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
41061 \begin_layout Standard
41063 \begin_inset Tabular
41064 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
41065 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41066 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41067 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41068 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41091 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41098 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41121 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41128 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41151 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41158 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41167 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41181 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41188 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41197 arg "spelling-continuously"
41205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41209 Spellcheck continuously
41215 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41238 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41245 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41268 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41275 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41298 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41305 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41328 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41335 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41358 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41365 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41374 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41388 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41394 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41407 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41414 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41428 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41434 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41447 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41456 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41470 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41471 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41478 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41499 Emphasize text, function of the
41501 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41503 \begin_inset space ~
41506 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41515 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41536 Set text to noun style, function of the
41538 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41540 \begin_inset space ~
41543 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41552 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41561 arg "textstyle-apply"
41569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41573 Format text using the current settings in the
41575 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41577 \begin_inset space ~
41580 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41589 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41612 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41613 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41615 \begin_inset space ~
41624 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41633 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41647 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41654 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41661 arg "tabular-insert"
41669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41675 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41682 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41691 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41703 Toggle outline window on/off,
41705 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41712 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41721 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41733 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41739 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41748 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41760 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41773 \begin_layout Subsection
41775 \begin_inset Index idx
41778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41787 \begin_layout Standard
41788 \begin_inset Graphics
41789 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41797 \begin_layout Standard
41798 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41804 \begin_layout Standard
41805 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41809 \begin_layout Standard
41810 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41816 \begin_layout Standard
41817 \begin_inset Tabular
41818 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41819 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41820 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41821 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41822 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41849 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41858 arg "layout Enumerate"
41866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41876 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41885 arg "layout Itemize"
41893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41903 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41930 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41939 arg "layout Description"
41947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41957 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41966 arg "depth-increment"
41974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41980 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41982 \begin_inset space ~
41986 \begin_inset space ~
41995 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42004 arg "depth-decrement"
42012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42018 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42020 \begin_inset space ~
42024 \begin_inset space ~
42033 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42042 arg "float-insert figure"
42050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42056 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42057 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42064 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42073 arg "float-insert table"
42081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42087 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42088 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42095 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42125 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42134 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
42142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42148 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42155 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42164 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42178 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42185 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42208 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42210 \begin_inset space ~
42219 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42228 arg "nomencl-insert"
42236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42242 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42244 \begin_inset space ~
42253 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42262 arg "footnote-insert"
42270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42276 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42283 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42292 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42306 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42308 \begin_inset space ~
42317 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42340 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42341 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42343 \begin_inset space ~
42352 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42361 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42375 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42382 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42405 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42412 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42435 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42437 \begin_inset space ~
42446 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42455 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42469 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42470 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42477 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42486 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42500 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42501 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42503 \begin_inset space ~
42512 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42521 arg "dialog-show character"
42529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42535 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42537 \begin_inset space ~
42540 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42547 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42556 arg "layout-paragraph"
42564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42570 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42572 \begin_inset space ~
42581 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42590 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42604 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42618 \begin_layout Subsection
42619 View/Update Toolbar
42620 \begin_inset Index idx
42623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42624 Toolbar ! View / Update
42632 \begin_layout Standard
42633 \begin_inset Graphics
42634 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42641 \begin_layout Standard
42642 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42648 \begin_layout Standard
42649 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42653 \begin_layout Standard
42654 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42660 \begin_layout Standard
42661 \begin_inset Tabular
42662 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42663 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42664 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42665 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42666 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42689 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42696 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42705 arg "buffer-update"
42713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42719 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42726 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42735 arg "master-buffer-view"
42743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42749 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42751 \begin_inset space ~
42760 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42769 arg "master-buffer-update"
42777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42783 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42785 \begin_inset space ~
42789 \begin_inset space ~
42798 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42807 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42821 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42822 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42823 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42824 Synchronize with Output
42830 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42853 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42854 View (Other Formats)
42860 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42867 arg "update-others"
42875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42881 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42882 Update (Other Formats)
42895 \begin_layout Standard
42896 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42900 \begin_layout Subsection
42904 \begin_layout Standard
42905 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42906 \begin_inset space ~
42910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42912 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42916 , the table toolbar
42917 \begin_inset Index idx
42920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42929 \begin_inset space ~
42934 manual and the math macro toolbar
42935 \begin_inset Index idx
42938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42951 \begin_layout Chapter
42952 The Document Settings
42953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42955 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42960 \begin_inset Index idx
42963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42964 Document ! Settings
42972 \begin_layout Standard
42976 \begin_inset space ~
42981 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42982 is called with the menu
42984 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42988 You can save your document settings as default with the
42990 Save as Document Defaults
42992 button in any dialog.
42993 This will create a template named
42997 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42998 when you create a new document without
43002 \begin_layout Standard
43007 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
43008 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
43011 \begin_layout Standard
43012 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
43013 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
43014 to find the one you are looking for.
43015 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
43016 the submenus of the dialog.
43018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43022 \begin_inset space \space{}
43026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43033 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
43034 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
43035 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
43038 \begin_layout Section
43042 \begin_layout Standard
43043 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
43045 Document classes are described in section
43046 \begin_inset space ~
43050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43052 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
43060 \begin_layout Standard
43064 \begin_inset space ~
43069 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
43074 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
43075 as a layout for a document class.
43076 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
43078 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
43087 \begin_layout Standard
43088 Some classes use special class options by default.
43089 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
43093 and you can decide to use them or not.
43094 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
43095 recommended you leave them untouched.
43100 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43101 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
43106 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43108 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
43113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43114 When you want to use one of the following drivers
43115 \begin_inset Newline newline
43120 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
43123 \begin_inset Newline newline
43126 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43127 distribution, see section
43132 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43134 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
43147 \begin_layout Standard
43152 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
43153 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
43154 in the background if the child document
43155 is opened without its master.
43156 This way child documents are always compilable.
43157 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43164 \begin_inset space ~
43172 \begin_layout Standard
43173 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43184 \begin_inset Index idx
43187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43189 -packages ! prettyref
43195 \begin_inset Index idx
43198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43200 -packages ! refstyle
43205 for cross-references, see section
43206 \begin_inset space ~
43210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43212 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43219 \begin_layout Section
43223 \begin_layout Standard
43224 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43225 Please refer to the section
43228 \begin_inset space ~
43236 \begin_inset space ~
43241 manual for details.
43244 \begin_layout Section
43248 \begin_layout Standard
43249 Modules are explained in section
43250 \begin_inset space ~
43254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43256 reference "subsec:Modules"
43263 \begin_layout Section
43267 \begin_layout Standard
43269 \begin_inset space ~
43273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43275 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43282 \begin_layout Section
43286 \begin_layout Standard
43287 The document font settings are described in section
43288 \begin_inset space ~
43292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43294 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43301 \begin_layout Section
43305 \begin_layout Standard
43306 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43318 \begin_inset space ~
43323 and whether it should be a
43326 \begin_inset space ~
43331 can also be specified here.
43334 \begin_layout Standard
43335 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43336 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43337 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43339 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43342 \begin_layout Standard
43345 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43348 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43349 justifies the text on screen.
43350 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43354 \begin_layout Section
43358 \begin_layout Standard
43359 This dialog is described in sections
43360 \begin_inset space ~
43364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43366 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43373 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43380 \begin_layout Section
43384 \begin_layout Standard
43385 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43386 \begin_inset space ~
43390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43392 reference "subsec:Margins"
43399 \begin_layout Section
43401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43403 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43408 \begin_inset Index idx
43411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43412 Language ! Encoding
43420 \begin_layout Standard
43421 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43422 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43423 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43425 is always encoded in utf8).
43426 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43427 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43428 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43429 -command is not known for
43430 a particular character).
43433 \begin_layout Standard
43434 If you use the option
43439 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43440 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43441 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43443 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43444 exactly one encoding.
43445 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43448 \begin_layout Standard
43450 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43451 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43452 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43453 installation supports Unicode), choose
43454 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43455 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43456 is quite incomplete, so
43457 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43462 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43463 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43464 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43465 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43466 -commands is not used, because all
43467 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43468 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43469 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43470 , two new alternative engines
43471 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43473 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43475 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43478 \begin_inset space ~
43486 \begin_inset space ~
43494 \begin_inset space ~
43500 \begin_inset space ~
43504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43506 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43511 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43515 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43518 \begin_layout Standard
43522 \begin_inset space ~
43527 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43528 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43538 The possible settings are:
43541 \begin_layout Description
43542 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43544 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43545 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43549 \begin_inset space ~
43553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43555 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43562 \begin_layout Description
43563 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43564 format you will use.
43565 In many cases this will be
43570 \begin_inset Index idx
43573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43581 If the newer package
43586 \begin_inset Index idx
43589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43591 -packages ! polyglossia
43596 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43597 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43598 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43600 this package will be used instead of
43607 \begin_layout Description
43609 \begin_inset space ~
43620 would be more appropriate.
43623 \begin_layout Description
43624 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43625 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43629 (for German texts), type in
43632 \begin_inset Newline newline
43637 usepackage{ngerman}
43640 \begin_layout Description
43641 None will not use a language package.
43642 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43645 \begin_layout Standard
43646 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43649 \begin_layout Description
43651 \begin_inset space ~
43655 \begin_inset space ~
43659 \begin_inset space ~
43666 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43672 \begin_inset Index idx
43675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43677 -packages ! inputenc
43683 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43684 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43685 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43689 \begin_layout Description
43690 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43692 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43693 commands, which may result in a big
43694 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43695 -commands are needed.
43698 \begin_layout Description
43700 \begin_inset space ~
43704 \begin_inset space ~
43707 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43710 \begin_layout Description
43712 \begin_inset space ~
43716 \begin_inset space ~
43719 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43722 \begin_layout Description
43724 \begin_inset space ~
43727 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43730 \begin_layout Description
43732 \begin_inset space ~
43736 \begin_inset space ~
43739 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43740 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43743 \begin_layout Description
43745 \begin_inset space ~
43749 \begin_inset space ~
43752 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43756 \begin_layout Description
43758 \begin_inset space ~
43762 \begin_inset space ~
43765 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43766 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43769 \begin_layout Description
43771 \begin_inset space ~
43775 \begin_inset space ~
43779 \begin_inset space ~
43782 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43783 \begin_inset space ~
43789 \begin_layout Description
43791 \begin_inset space ~
43795 \begin_inset space ~
43799 \begin_inset space ~
43802 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43803 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43806 \begin_layout Description
43808 \begin_inset space ~
43812 \begin_inset space ~
43815 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43816 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43817 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43818 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43819 \begin_inset space ~
43823 \begin_inset space ~
43829 \begin_layout Description
43831 \begin_inset space ~
43835 \begin_inset space ~
43838 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43839 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43840 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43842 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43843 \begin_inset space ~
43847 \begin_inset space ~
43853 \begin_layout Description
43855 \begin_inset space ~
43859 \begin_inset space ~
43862 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43865 \begin_layout Description
43867 \begin_inset space ~
43871 \begin_inset space ~
43874 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43877 \begin_layout Description
43879 \begin_inset space ~
43883 \begin_inset space ~
43886 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43889 \begin_layout Description
43891 \begin_inset space ~
43894 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43897 \begin_layout Description
43899 \begin_inset space ~
43902 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43905 \begin_layout Description
43907 \begin_inset space ~
43911 \begin_inset space ~
43914 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43917 \begin_layout Description
43919 \begin_inset space ~
43923 \begin_inset space ~
43929 \begin_layout Description
43931 \begin_inset space ~
43935 \begin_inset space ~
43938 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43941 \begin_layout Description
43943 \begin_inset space ~
43947 \begin_inset space ~
43953 \begin_layout Description
43955 \begin_inset space ~
43959 \begin_inset space ~
43962 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43968 \begin_inset Index idx
43971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43978 , when using this, set the document language to
43983 \begin_layout Description
43985 \begin_inset space ~
43989 \begin_inset space ~
43992 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43997 , when using this, set the document language to
44000 \begin_inset space ~
44006 \begin_layout Description
44008 \begin_inset space ~
44012 \begin_inset space ~
44015 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44021 \begin_inset Index idx
44024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44026 -packages ! japanese
44031 , when using this, set the document language to
44036 \begin_layout Description
44038 \begin_inset space ~
44042 \begin_inset space ~
44045 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44050 , when using this, set the document language to
44055 \begin_layout Description
44057 \begin_inset space ~
44061 \begin_inset space ~
44064 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44069 , when using this, set the document language to
44074 \begin_layout Description
44076 \begin_inset space ~
44079 (EUC-KR) for Korean
44082 \begin_layout Description
44084 \begin_inset space ~
44088 \begin_inset space ~
44092 \begin_inset space ~
44095 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
44098 \begin_layout Description
44100 \begin_inset space ~
44104 \begin_inset space ~
44108 \begin_inset space ~
44111 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
44112 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
44113 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
44116 \begin_layout Description
44118 \begin_inset space ~
44122 \begin_inset space ~
44128 \begin_layout Description
44130 \begin_inset space ~
44134 \begin_inset space ~
44137 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
44138 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
44141 \begin_layout Description
44143 \begin_inset space ~
44147 \begin_inset space ~
44150 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44156 \begin_inset Index idx
44159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44166 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44169 \begin_layout Description
44171 \begin_inset space ~
44179 \begin_inset space ~
44182 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44189 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44192 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44199 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44200 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44202 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44205 \begin_layout Description
44207 \begin_inset space ~
44211 \begin_inset space ~
44214 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44220 \begin_inset Index idx
44223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44230 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44233 \begin_layout Description
44235 \begin_inset space ~
44238 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44244 \begin_inset Index idx
44247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44249 -packages ! inputenc
44255 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44259 \begin_layout Description
44261 \begin_inset space ~
44265 \begin_inset space ~
44269 \begin_inset space ~
44272 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44273 \begin_inset space ~
44279 \begin_layout Description
44281 \begin_inset space ~
44285 \begin_inset space ~
44289 \begin_inset space ~
44292 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44293 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44294 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44298 \begin_layout Description
44300 \begin_inset space ~
44304 \begin_inset space ~
44308 \begin_inset space ~
44311 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44312 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44315 \begin_layout Section
44317 \begin_inset Index idx
44320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44327 \begin_inset Index idx
44330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44337 \begin_inset Index idx
44340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44341 Color ! Shaded boxes
44347 \begin_inset Index idx
44350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44351 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44359 \begin_layout Standard
44360 Here you can alter the font color for the
44364 (default: black), for
44367 \begin_inset space ~
44372 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44376 (default: white) and for
44379 \begin_inset space ~
44389 sets the color back to the default.
44392 \begin_layout Standard
44393 Clicking any button showing
44401 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44402 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44403 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44404 later more quickly.
44407 \begin_layout Standard
44408 Note, if you change the
44411 \begin_inset space ~
44416 font color and use the option
44419 \begin_inset space ~
44424 in the document settings under
44427 \begin_inset space ~
44432 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44433 \begin_inset space ~
44437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44439 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44446 \begin_layout Standard
44447 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44453 \begin_layout Standard
44457 \begin_inset space ~
44466 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44469 \begin_inset space ~
44472 Code after a forced page break:
44475 \begin_layout Itemize
44476 For the page color:
44477 \begin_inset Newline newline
44484 pagecolor{color name}
44487 \begin_layout Itemize
44488 For the text color:
44489 \begin_inset Newline newline
44499 \begin_layout Standard
44500 You are restricted to one of
44536 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44543 \begin_inset space ~
44549 \begin_inset Newline newline
44552 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44553 names to refer to them:
44556 \begin_layout Itemize
44562 \begin_inset Newline newline
44567 page_backgroundcolor
44570 \begin_layout Itemize
44574 \begin_inset space ~
44580 \begin_inset Newline newline
44588 \begin_layout Itemize
44592 \begin_inset space ~
44598 \begin_inset Newline newline
44606 \begin_layout Itemize
44610 \begin_inset space ~
44616 \begin_inset Newline newline
44624 \begin_layout Standard
44625 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44628 \begin_inset space ~
44636 \begin_inset space ~
44644 \begin_layout Section
44648 \begin_layout Standard
44649 Here you can adjust the
44653 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44657 as described in section
44658 \begin_inset space ~
44662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44664 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44671 \begin_layout Section
44675 \begin_layout Standard
44676 Here you can specify if a
44677 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887883
44680 citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44682 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887840
44688 \begin_inset Index idx
44691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44693 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887846
44695 -packages ! biblatex
44707 \begin_inset Index idx
44710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44722 \begin_inset Index idx
44725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44727 -packages ! jurabib
44734 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887869
44735 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44737 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887870
44742 Sectioned bibliography
44744 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44750 \begin_inset Index idx
44753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44755 -packages ! bibtopic
44761 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887945
44763 If you use Biblatex, you can select the style files and specify further
44768 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887949
44770 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887950
44774 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887962
44781 for the generation of the bibliography.
44782 For a further description
44783 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887970
44787 \begin_inset space ~
44791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44793 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44800 \begin_layout Section
44804 \begin_layout Standard
44805 Here you can define the
44809 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44811 \begin_inset space ~
44815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44817 reference "sec:Index"
44824 \begin_layout Section
44828 \begin_layout Standard
44829 The PDF properties are explained in section
44830 \begin_inset space ~
44834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44836 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44843 \begin_layout Section
44847 \begin_layout Standard
44848 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44849 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44855 \begin_inset Index idx
44858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44860 -packages ! amsmath
44870 \begin_inset Index idx
44873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44875 -packages ! amssymb
44885 \begin_inset Index idx
44888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44900 \begin_inset Index idx
44903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44915 \begin_inset Index idx
44918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44920 -packages ! mathdots
44930 \begin_inset Index idx
44933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44935 -packages ! mathtools
44945 \begin_inset Index idx
44948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44960 \begin_inset Index idx
44963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44965 -packages ! stackrel
44975 \begin_inset Index idx
44978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44980 -packages ! stmaryrd
44990 \begin_inset Index idx
44993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44995 -packages ! undertilde
45000 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
45003 \begin_layout Description
45004 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45005 -errors in formulas,
45006 ensure that you have this enabled.
45009 \begin_layout Description
45010 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
45011 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45012 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
45016 \begin_layout Description
45017 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
45020 \begin_inset space ~
45032 \begin_layout Description
45033 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
45036 \begin_inset space ~
45048 \begin_layout Description
45049 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
45060 \begin_layout Description
45061 mathtools is used for the math commands
45097 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
45104 \begin_layout Description
45105 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
45107 Chemical Symbols and Equations
45116 \begin_layout Description
45117 stackrel is used for the math command
45134 \begin_layout Description
45135 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
45138 \begin_layout Description
45139 undertilde is used for the math command
45147 Accents for one Character
45156 \begin_layout Section
45160 \begin_layout Standard
45161 The float placement options are described in the section
45164 \begin_inset space ~
45172 \begin_inset space ~
45180 \begin_layout Section
45184 \begin_layout Standard
45185 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
45187 Program Code Listings
45192 \begin_inset space ~
45200 \begin_layout Section
45204 \begin_layout Standard
45205 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45213 set to be used and set the
45218 The itemize environment is described in section
45219 \begin_inset space ~
45223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45225 reference "sec:Itemize"
45232 \begin_layout Standard
45233 You can furthermore specify a
45236 \begin_inset space ~
45241 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45242 command of the desired character.
45243 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45250 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45256 \begin_inset space \space{}
45260 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45270 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45271 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45274 \begin_layout Standard
45275 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45283 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45284 -packages in the preamble (menu
45287 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45288 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45291 \begin_inset space ~
45297 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45301 usepackage{textcomp}
45304 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45308 usepackage{amssymb}
45318 \begin_layout Section
45322 \begin_layout Standard
45323 Branches are described in section
45324 \begin_inset space ~
45328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45330 reference "sec:Branches"
45337 \begin_layout Section
45339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45341 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45348 \begin_layout Standard
45349 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45352 \begin_layout Description
45354 \begin_inset space ~
45358 \begin_inset space ~
45361 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45381 View Master Document
45382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45389 Update Master Document
45390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45397 menu or the toolbar.
45398 The default is set in
45400 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45401 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45403 \begin_inset space ~
45406 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45410 \begin_inset space ~
45414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45416 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45423 \begin_layout Description
45425 \begin_inset space ~
45429 \begin_inset space ~
45432 Output settings for the menu
45434 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45436 \begin_inset space ~
45442 For a detailed description see section
45444 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45449 \begin_inset space ~
45457 \begin_layout Description
45459 \begin_inset space ~
45463 \begin_inset space ~
45466 Options offers settings for the export format
45474 \begin_inset space ~
45479 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45480 \begin_inset space ~
45483 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45487 \begin_inset space ~
45492 settings are described in detail in section
45494 Math Output in XHTML
45499 \begin_inset space ~
45508 \begin_inset space ~
45512 \begin_inset space ~
45517 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45520 \begin_layout Description
45522 \begin_inset space ~
45527 Save transient properties
45529 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45530 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45531 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45535 \begin_layout Itemize
45536 the activation of change tracking
45539 \begin_layout Itemize
45540 the output of tracked changes
45543 \begin_layout Itemize
45544 the recording of the document directory path.
45547 \begin_layout Standard
45548 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45549 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45553 \begin_layout Section
45561 \begin_layout Standard
45562 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45564 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45566 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45568 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45572 \begin_layout Standard
45573 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45574 -syntax is given in section
45575 \begin_inset space ~
45579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45581 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45588 \begin_layout Chapter
45594 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45596 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45601 \begin_inset Index idx
45604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45613 \begin_layout Standard
45614 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45616 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45620 It has the following submenus.
45623 \begin_layout Section
45627 \begin_layout Subsection
45631 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45632 User Interface File
45633 \begin_inset Index idx
45636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45637 Customization ! of toolbars
45643 \begin_inset Index idx
45646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45647 Customization ! of menus
45655 \begin_layout Standard
45656 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45657 interface (ui) file.
45658 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45666 \begin_layout Description
45671 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45674 \begin_layout Description
45681 the menu entries in popup context menus
45684 \begin_layout Description
45689 specifies the toolbar buttons
45692 \begin_layout Standard
45693 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45694 and edit the entries.
45697 \begin_layout Standard
45698 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45710 entries must be finished with an explicit
45735 and in the case of the
45736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45748 The syntax for the entries is:
45751 \begin_layout Standard
45752 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45781 \begin_layout Standard
45783 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45786 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45787 -functions are listed in the menu
45789 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45791 \begin_inset space ~
45799 \begin_layout Standard
45800 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45806 \begin_layout Standard
45807 For example, assuming you use the menu
45809 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45812 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45816 \begin_layout Standard
45817 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45841 \begin_layout Standard
45843 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45858 to have the sixth bookmark.
45861 \begin_layout Standard
45865 \begin_inset space ~
45870 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45871 's toolbar buttons.
45872 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45873 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45876 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45884 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45888 \begin_layout Standard
45891 Enable tool tips in main work area
45893 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45897 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45901 \begin_layout Standard
45906 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45907 should display in the menu
45909 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45911 \begin_inset space ~
45919 \begin_layout Subsection
45923 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45927 \begin_layout Standard
45930 Restore window layouts and geometries
45933 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45934 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45938 \begin_layout Standard
45941 Restore cursor positions
45943 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45947 \begin_layout Standard
45950 Load opened files from last session
45952 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45956 \begin_layout Standard
45959 Clear all session information
45961 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45962 sessions (cursor positions, names
45963 of last opened documents, etc.).
45966 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45970 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45975 \begin_inset Index idx
45978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45987 \begin_layout Standard
45990 Backup original documents when saving
45992 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45993 it was saved the last time.
45994 It is stored in the
45997 \begin_inset space ~
46003 \begin_inset space ~
46007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46009 reference "sec:Paths"
46013 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
46016 \begin_inset space ~
46022 The backup file has the file extension
46023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46037 \begin_layout Standard
46040 Backup documents, every
46042 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
46045 \begin_layout Standard
46048 Save documents compressed by default
46050 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
46051 \begin_inset space ~
46055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46057 reference "subsec:Compressed"
46062 This applies to newly created documents only.
46063 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
46066 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46067 Windows & work area
46070 \begin_layout Standard
46073 Open documents in tabs
46075 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
46079 \begin_layout Standard
46084 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
46089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46091 \begin_inset space ~
46095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46097 reference "sec:Paths"
46101 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
46108 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
46109 documents will be opened in the same running instance
46110 of \SpecialChar LyX
46112 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
46113 instance is created for each file.
46116 \begin_layout Standard
46119 Single close-tab button
46121 is checked, there will only be one close button (
46131 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
46132 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
46134 \change_inserted 274215730 1469338548
46135 Regardless of this option, one may always close a tab by middle-clicking
46141 \begin_layout Standard
46142 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46150 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
46151 before the change takes effect.
46159 \begin_layout Standard
46164 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
46166 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
46168 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46172 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
46173 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
46174 and only want to close the view in once instance.
46177 \begin_layout Subsection
46179 \begin_inset Index idx
46182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46189 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46191 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46198 \begin_layout Standard
46199 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46203 \begin_layout Standard
46204 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46212 This section only deals with the fonts
46216 the \SpecialChar LyX
46218 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46221 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46222 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46233 \begin_layout Standard
46234 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46251 (depends on the system) as its
46254 \begin_inset space ~
46270 \begin_layout Standard
46271 You can change the font size with the
46278 \begin_layout Standard
46283 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46285 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46288 points have the size of 1
46289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46293 \begin_inset space ~
46297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46299 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46304 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46309 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46310 \begin_inset space ~
46314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46316 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46323 \begin_layout Standard
46326 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46328 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46329 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46330 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46331 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46332 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46334 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46335 \begin_inset space ~
46341 \begin_layout Subsection
46343 \begin_inset Index idx
46346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46347 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46354 \begin_inset Index idx
46357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46366 \begin_layout Standard
46367 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46368 by choosing an item in the
46369 list and selecting the
46376 \begin_layout Standard
46377 By checking the option
46381 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46384 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46385 \begin_inset space ~
46389 \begin_inset space ~
46394 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46397 \begin_layout Subsection
46399 \begin_inset Index idx
46402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46411 \begin_layout Standard
46412 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46416 \begin_layout Standard
46421 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46422 This feature is described in section
46423 \begin_inset space ~
46427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46429 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46436 \begin_layout Standard
46437 Checking the option
46440 \begin_inset space ~
46444 \begin_inset space ~
46448 \begin_inset space ~
46453 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46456 \begin_layout Section
46458 \begin_inset Index idx
46461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46470 \begin_layout Subsection
46474 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46478 \begin_layout Standard
46481 Cursor follows scrollbar
46483 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46487 \begin_layout Standard
46488 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46489 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46490 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46493 \begin_layout Standard
46496 Scroll below end of document
46498 is self-explanatory.
46501 \begin_layout Standard
46502 In \SpecialChar LyX
46503 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46510 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46512 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46513 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46516 \begin_layout Standard
46519 Sort environments alphabetically
46521 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46524 \begin_layout Standard
46527 Group environments by their category
46529 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46532 \begin_layout Standard
46537 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46548 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46552 \begin_layout Standard
46553 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46558 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46559 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46563 \begin_layout Subsection
46565 \begin_inset Index idx
46568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46575 \begin_inset Index idx
46578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46579 Settings ! Shortcuts
46587 \begin_layout Standard
46592 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46594 Several binding files are available, among them:
46597 \begin_layout Description
46598 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46601 \begin_layout Description
46602 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46614 \begin_layout Description
46615 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46626 \begin_layout Standard
46627 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46632 , and binding files for special languages.
46633 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46634 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46638 \begin_inset space \space{}
46642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46650 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46651 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46652 will try to use the appropriate binding
46656 \begin_layout Standard
46657 Some binding files, like
46661 , only have a limited scope.
46662 When looking at the end of the file
46666 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46669 \begin_layout Standard
46673 \begin_inset space ~
46677 \begin_inset space ~
46682 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46683 in the selected key binding file.
46686 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46690 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46695 \begin_inset Index idx
46698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46699 Key Bindings ! Editing
46707 \begin_layout Standard
46708 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
46709 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46710 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46711 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46714 Show key-bindings containing
46717 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46718 Insert there for example as keyword
46719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46726 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46727 functions that contain
46728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46736 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46737 All \SpecialChar LyX
46738 functions are also listed in the file
46743 that you will find in the
46750 \begin_layout Standard
46751 For example, to add the shortcut
46759 , select the function and press the
46764 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46765 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46768 \begin_layout Standard
46769 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46770 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46772 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46773 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46775 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46780 \begin_layout Standard
46781 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46784 \begin_layout Standard
46785 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46787 The syntax of the entries is:
46790 \begin_layout Standard
46796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46815 \begin_layout Subsection
46817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46819 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46824 \begin_inset Index idx
46827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46834 \begin_inset Index idx
46837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46838 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46846 \begin_layout Standard
46847 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46848 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46849 provides keyboard maps.
46850 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46851 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46854 \begin_inset space ~
46858 \begin_inset space ~
46863 and select the keyboard map file named
46870 \begin_layout Standard
46879 keyboard map and, if you use the
46883 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46886 arg "keymap-primary"
46892 arg "keymap-secondary"
46895 respectively or toggle between them with
46898 arg "keymap-toggle"
46904 \begin_layout Standard
46905 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46913 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46922 \begin_layout Standard
46923 You can also specify the mouse
46925 Wheel scrolling speed
46928 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46932 Middle mouse button pasting
46934 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46935 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46938 \begin_layout Standard
46946 \begin_inset space ~
46950 \begin_inset space ~
46955 you can select a key for zooming.
46956 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46959 \begin_layout Subsection
46963 \begin_layout Standard
46964 Input completion is described in section
46965 \begin_inset space ~
46969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46971 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46978 \begin_layout Section
46980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46987 \begin_inset Index idx
46990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46997 \begin_inset Index idx
47000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47009 \begin_layout Standard
47010 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
47011 are normally determined during
47013 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
47016 \begin_layout Description
47018 \begin_inset space ~
47021 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
47022 's working directory.
47023 It is the default when you
47034 \begin_inset space ~
47042 \begin_layout Description
47044 \begin_inset space ~
47047 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
47049 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47051 \begin_inset space ~
47055 \begin_inset space ~
47063 \begin_layout Description
47065 \begin_inset space ~
47068 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
47074 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47078 \begin_inset Newline newline
47082 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47094 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
47095 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
47103 \begin_layout Description
47105 \begin_inset space ~
47109 \begin_inset Index idx
47112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47118 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
47119 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
47120 \begin_inset space ~
47124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47126 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47134 will be used to save the backups.
47135 \begin_inset Newline newline
47138 Backup files have the ending
47139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47149 \begin_layout Description
47151 \begin_inset space ~
47154 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47155 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47157 \begin_inset Newline newline
47164 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47170 You can edit this file with the program
47179 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47180 in its preferences under
47183 \begin_inset space ~
47189 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47194 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47196 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47197 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47203 and \SpecialChar LyX
47204 need to be running the same time.
47205 \begin_inset Newline newline
47208 The pipe is also used for the
47212 feature, see section
47213 \begin_inset space ~
47217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47219 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47224 \begin_inset Newline newline
47227 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47228 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47229 \begin_inset Newline newline
47245 \begin_layout Description
47247 \begin_inset space ~
47250 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47253 \begin_layout Description
47255 \begin_inset space ~
47258 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47259 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47260 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47263 \begin_layout Description
47265 \begin_inset space ~
47268 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47274 You only need to specify it if you are using
47278 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47280 For \SpecialChar LyX
47285 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47289 \begin_layout Description
47291 \begin_inset space ~
47294 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47295 When \SpecialChar LyX
47296 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47297 to find it on the system.
47298 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47300 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47309 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47310 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47313 \begin_layout Description
47315 \begin_inset space ~
47318 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47319 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47320 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47321 code or in the document
47323 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47325 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47326 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47327 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47328 scanned for the input files.
47329 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47330 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47332 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47333 compilation may fail for some documents.
47336 \begin_layout Section
47340 \begin_layout Standard
47341 Here you can insert your
47350 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47352 \begin_inset space ~
47356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47358 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47362 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47365 \begin_layout Section
47367 \begin_inset Index idx
47370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47371 Language ! Settings
47377 \begin_inset Index idx
47380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47381 Settings ! Language
47389 \begin_layout Subsection
47391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47393 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47400 \begin_layout Description
47402 \begin_inset space ~
47406 \begin_inset space ~
47409 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47411 You can find its actual translation status here:
47412 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47414 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47422 \begin_layout Description
47424 \begin_inset space ~
47427 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47428 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47429 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47430 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47447 The most widespread language package is
47452 \begin_inset Index idx
47455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47462 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47464 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47465 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47466 come with the alternative
47472 \begin_inset Index idx
47475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47477 -packages ! polyglossia
47482 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47483 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47489 The available selections are described in section
47490 \begin_inset space ~
47494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47496 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47503 \begin_layout Description
47505 \begin_inset space ~
47508 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47509 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47510 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47511 An example is the start command
47517 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47519 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47523 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47539 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47544 \begin_layout Description
47546 \begin_inset space ~
47554 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47555 command toggles the package on and off.
47558 \begin_layout Description
47560 \begin_inset space ~
47564 \begin_inset space ~
47567 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47571 \begin_layout Description
47573 \begin_inset space ~
47577 \begin_inset space ~
47580 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47584 \begin_layout Description
47586 \begin_inset space ~
47590 \begin_inset space ~
47593 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47594 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47595 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47597 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47604 \begin_layout Description
47606 \begin_inset space ~
47609 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47611 When this option is not set, the
47614 \begin_inset space ~
47619 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47621 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47624 \begin_inset space ~
47632 \begin_layout Description
47634 \begin_inset space ~
47640 \begin_inset space ~
47646 When it is not set, the
47649 \begin_inset space ~
47654 is set to the end of the document.
47657 \begin_layout Description
47659 \begin_inset space ~
47663 \begin_inset space ~
47666 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47667 language will be underlined in blue.
47670 \begin_layout Description
47672 \begin_inset space ~
47676 \begin_inset space ~
47679 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47680 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47683 \begin_layout Description
47685 \begin_inset space ~
47688 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47689 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47690 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47691 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47694 \begin_layout Subsection
47698 \begin_layout Standard
47699 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47700 \begin_inset space ~
47704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47706 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47713 \begin_layout Section
47717 \begin_layout Subsection
47719 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47721 name "subsec:General-output"
47728 \begin_layout Description
47730 \begin_inset space ~
47733 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47735 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47737 \begin_inset space ~
47743 For a detailed description see section
47745 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47750 \begin_inset space ~
47758 \begin_layout Description
47760 \begin_inset space ~
47763 Options Options for the program
47767 that is used for the export format
47772 \begin_inset space ~
47776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47778 reference "subsec:Export"
47783 Possible options are listed in the
47788 \begin_inset Newline newline
47792 \begin_inset Flex URL
47795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47797 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47807 \begin_layout Description
47809 \begin_inset space ~
47813 \begin_inset space ~
47816 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47819 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47820 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47822 \begin_inset space ~
47828 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47831 \begin_layout Description
47833 \begin_inset space ~
47837 \begin_inset Index idx
47840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47847 \begin_inset Index idx
47850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47851 Settings ! Date format
47856 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47857 \begin_inset Newline newline
47861 \begin_inset Flex URL
47864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47866 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47872 \begin_inset Newline newline
47875 For example the format
47876 \begin_inset Newline newline
47880 \begin_inset Newline newline
47883 prints the date as day/month/year.
47886 \begin_layout Description
47888 \begin_inset space ~
47892 \begin_inset space ~
47895 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47896 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47899 \begin_layout Subsection
47905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47907 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47912 \begin_inset Index idx
47915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47916 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47925 \begin_layout Description
47927 \begin_inset space ~
47935 \begin_inset space ~
47939 \begin_inset space ~
47942 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47947 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47968 are used for Cyrillic.
47969 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47982 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47984 sets up in the background.
47985 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47988 \begin_layout Description
47990 \begin_inset space ~
47994 \begin_inset space ~
47998 \begin_inset space ~
48002 \begin_inset space ~
48005 options They only have an effect when the program
48009 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
48012 \begin_layout Standard
48013 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
48014 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
48015 manuals of the applications.
48018 \begin_layout Description
48020 \begin_inset space ~
48023 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
48024 \begin_inset space ~
48028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48030 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
48037 \begin_layout Description
48039 \begin_inset space ~
48042 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
48043 \begin_inset space ~
48047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48049 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
48056 \begin_layout Description
48058 \begin_inset space ~
48061 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
48062 \begin_inset space ~
48066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48068 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
48075 \begin_layout Description
48081 \begin_inset space ~
48084 command Command for the program
48086 Check\SpecialChar TeX
48089 that is described in the section
48091 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
48096 Additional Features
48101 \begin_layout Standard
48102 There are additionally the following options:
48105 \begin_layout Description
48107 \begin_inset space ~
48111 \begin_inset space ~
48115 \begin_inset space ~
48119 \begin_inset space ~
48124 \begin_inset space ~
48127 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
48128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48145 to separate folders.
48146 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48148 \begin_inset Index idx
48151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48158 \begin_inset Index idx
48161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48170 \begin_layout Description
48172 \begin_inset space ~
48176 \begin_inset space ~
48180 \begin_inset space ~
48184 \begin_inset space ~
48188 \begin_inset space ~
48192 \begin_inset space ~
48195 changes Removes all manually set
48201 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48202 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48204 \begin_inset space ~
48209 dialog when changing the document class.
48212 \begin_layout Section
48214 \begin_inset space ~
48218 \begin_inset Index idx
48221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48230 \begin_layout Subsection
48232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48234 name "subsec:Converters"
48239 \begin_inset Index idx
48242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48251 \begin_layout Standard
48252 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48253 from one format to another.
48254 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48255 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48262 \begin_inset space ~
48267 field and press the
48272 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48276 \begin_inset space ~
48281 drop-down list, modify the
48285 field and press the
48292 \begin_layout Standard
48295 Converter File Cache
48301 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48303 Maximum Age (in days
48306 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48307 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48310 \begin_layout Standard
48311 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48312 definition, is described in the section
48323 \begin_layout Subsection
48325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48327 name "sec:File-Formats"
48332 \begin_inset Index idx
48335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48342 \begin_inset Index idx
48345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48354 \begin_layout Standard
48355 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48365 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48368 \begin_layout Standard
48369 You can also define the
48371 Default output format
48373 that is used when you use
48375 View, Update, View Master Document
48379 Update Master Document
48385 menu or the toolbar.
48388 \begin_layout Standard
48389 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48400 \begin_layout Standard
48401 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48403 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48404 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48405 This is done by specifying a
48410 More about this is described in the section
48421 \begin_layout Chapter
48422 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48424 \begin_inset Index idx
48427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48436 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48443 \begin_layout Standard
48445 \begin_inset space ~
48449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48451 reference "tab:Units"
48455 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48456 and used in this documentation.
48459 \begin_layout Standard
48460 \begin_inset Float table
48466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48467 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48485 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48493 \begin_inset Tabular
48494 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
48495 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48496 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48497 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48498 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48631 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48635 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48668 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48704 scaled point (65536
48705 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48783 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48787 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48820 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48856 % of original image width
48861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49172 \begin_layout Chapter
49174 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49176 name "chap:Credits"
49183 \begin_layout Standard
49184 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
49185 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
49188 \begin_layout Itemize
49191 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
49194 \begin_layout Itemize
49200 \begin_layout Itemize
49206 \begin_layout Itemize
49212 \begin_layout Itemize
49218 \begin_layout Itemize
49224 \begin_layout Itemize
49230 \begin_layout Itemize
49236 \begin_layout Itemize
49239 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
49242 \begin_layout Itemize
49248 \begin_layout Itemize
49254 \begin_layout Itemize
49260 \begin_layout Itemize
49266 \begin_layout Itemize
49272 \begin_layout Itemize
49278 \begin_layout Itemize
49284 \begin_layout Itemize
49290 \begin_layout Itemize
49291 The \SpecialChar LyX
49293 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49303 \begin_layout Standard
49304 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49307 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49314 \begin_layout Bibliography
49315 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49316 LatexCommand bibitem
49323 The \SpecialChar LyX
49325 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49328 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49334 \begin_inset Newline newline
49338 \begin_inset Flex URL
49341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49343 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
49351 \begin_layout Bibliography
49352 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49353 LatexCommand bibitem
49354 key "latexcompanion"
49359 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49361 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49362 Companion Second Edition.
49365 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49368 \begin_layout Bibliography
49369 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49370 LatexCommand bibitem
49376 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49379 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49383 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49386 \begin_layout Bibliography
49387 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49388 LatexCommand bibitem
49397 : A Document Preparation System.
49400 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49403 \begin_layout Bibliography
49404 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49405 LatexCommand bibitem
49415 The \SpecialChar TeX
49419 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49422 \begin_layout Bibliography
49423 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49424 LatexCommand bibitem
49430 The \SpecialChar TeX
49432 \begin_inset Newline newline
49436 \begin_inset Flex URL
49439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49441 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49449 \begin_layout Bibliography
49450 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49451 LatexCommand bibitem
49457 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49459 \begin_inset Newline newline
49463 \begin_inset Flex URL
49466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49468 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49476 \begin_layout Bibliography
49477 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49478 LatexCommand bibitem
49485 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49487 name "Documentation"
49488 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49495 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49499 \begin_inset Newline newline
49503 \begin_inset Flex URL
49506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49508 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49516 \begin_layout Bibliography
49517 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49518 LatexCommand bibitem
49525 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49527 name "Documentation"
49528 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49533 how to use the program
49535 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49539 \begin_inset Newline newline
49543 \begin_inset Flex URL
49546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49548 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49554 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884806
49558 \begin_layout Bibliography
49560 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884882
49561 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49562 LatexCommand bibitem
49569 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49572 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49582 \begin_inset Newline newline
49586 \begin_inset Flex URL
49589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49591 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884888
49593 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49603 \begin_layout Bibliography
49604 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49605 LatexCommand bibitem
49612 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49614 name "Documentation"
49615 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49625 \begin_inset Newline newline
49629 \begin_inset Flex URL
49632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49634 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49642 \begin_layout Bibliography
49643 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49644 LatexCommand bibitem
49645 key "makeindex-man"
49651 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49654 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49664 \begin_inset Newline newline
49668 \begin_inset Flex URL
49671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49673 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49681 \begin_layout Bibliography
49682 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49683 LatexCommand bibitem
49690 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49692 name "Documentation"
49693 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49703 \begin_inset Newline newline
49707 \begin_inset Flex URL
49710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49712 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49720 \begin_layout Bibliography
49721 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49722 LatexCommand bibitem
49729 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49731 name "Documentation"
49732 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49737 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49739 \begin_inset Newline newline
49743 \begin_inset Flex URL
49746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49748 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49756 \begin_layout Bibliography
49757 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49758 LatexCommand bibitem
49765 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49767 name "Documentation"
49768 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49773 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49779 \begin_inset Index idx
49782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49784 -packages ! caption
49790 \begin_inset Newline newline
49794 \begin_inset Flex URL
49797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49799 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49807 \begin_layout Bibliography
49808 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49809 LatexCommand bibitem
49816 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49818 name "Documentation"
49819 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49824 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49830 \begin_inset Index idx
49833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49835 -packages ! enumitem
49841 \begin_inset Newline newline
49845 \begin_inset Flex URL
49848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49850 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49858 \begin_layout Bibliography
49859 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49860 LatexCommand bibitem
49867 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49869 name "Documentation"
49870 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49875 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49881 \begin_inset Index idx
49884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49886 -packages ! fancyhdr
49892 \begin_inset Newline newline
49896 \begin_inset Flex URL
49899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49901 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49909 \begin_layout Bibliography
49910 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49911 LatexCommand bibitem
49918 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49920 name "Documentation"
49921 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49926 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49932 \begin_inset Index idx
49935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49937 -packages ! hyperref
49943 \begin_inset Newline newline
49947 \begin_inset Flex URL
49950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49952 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49960 \begin_layout Bibliography
49961 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49962 LatexCommand bibitem
49969 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49971 name "Documentation"
49972 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49977 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49983 \begin_inset Index idx
49986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49988 -packages ! nomencl
49994 \begin_inset Newline newline
49998 \begin_inset Flex URL
50001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50003 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
50011 \begin_layout Bibliography
50012 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50013 LatexCommand bibitem
50020 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50022 name "Documentation"
50023 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
50028 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50034 \begin_inset Index idx
50037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50039 -packages ! prettyref
50045 \begin_inset Newline newline
50049 \begin_inset Flex URL
50052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50054 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
50062 \begin_layout Bibliography
50063 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50064 LatexCommand bibitem
50071 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50073 name "Documentation"
50074 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
50079 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50085 \begin_inset Index idx
50088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50090 -packages ! refstyle
50096 \begin_inset Newline newline
50100 \begin_inset Flex URL
50103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50105 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
50113 \begin_layout Bibliography
50114 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50115 LatexCommand bibitem
50122 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50125 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50130 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50132 \begin_inset Newline newline
50136 \begin_inset Flex URL
50139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50141 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50149 \begin_layout Bibliography
50150 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50151 LatexCommand bibitem
50158 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50161 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50166 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50168 \begin_inset Newline newline
50172 \begin_inset Flex URL
50175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50177 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50185 \begin_layout Bibliography
50186 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50187 LatexCommand bibitem
50194 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50197 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50202 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50203 for Cyrillic languages:
50204 \begin_inset Newline newline
50208 \begin_inset Flex URL
50211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50213 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50221 \begin_layout Bibliography
50222 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50223 LatexCommand bibitem
50230 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50233 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50238 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50240 \begin_inset Newline newline
50244 \begin_inset Flex URL
50247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50249 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50257 \begin_layout Bibliography
50258 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50259 LatexCommand bibitem
50266 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50269 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50274 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50276 \begin_inset Newline newline
50280 \begin_inset Flex URL
50283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50285 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50293 \begin_layout Bibliography
50294 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50295 LatexCommand bibitem
50302 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50305 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50310 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50312 \begin_inset Newline newline
50316 \begin_inset Flex URL
50319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50321 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50329 \begin_layout Bibliography
50330 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50331 LatexCommand bibitem
50338 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50341 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
50346 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50348 \begin_inset Newline newline
50352 \begin_inset Flex URL
50355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50357 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
50365 \begin_layout Bibliography
50366 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50367 LatexCommand bibitem
50374 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50377 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
50382 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50384 \begin_inset Newline newline
50388 \begin_inset Flex URL
50391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50393 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
50401 \begin_layout Bibliography
50402 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50403 LatexCommand bibitem
50410 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50413 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
50418 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50420 \begin_inset Newline newline
50424 \begin_inset Flex URL
50427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50429 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
50437 \begin_layout Bibliography
50438 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50439 LatexCommand bibitem
50446 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50449 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
50454 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50456 \begin_inset Newline newline
50460 \begin_inset Flex URL
50463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50465 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
50473 \begin_layout Bibliography
50474 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50475 LatexCommand bibitem
50482 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50485 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
50490 about new features in
50496 \begin_inset Newline newline
50500 \begin_inset Flex URL
50503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50505 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
50513 \begin_layout Standard
50514 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50548 \begin_inset Note Note
50551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50558 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50559 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50560 bibliography is the second one:
50568 \begin_layout Standard
50569 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50570 LatexCommand bibtex
50571 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50572 options "biblio/alphadin"
50579 \begin_layout Standard
50580 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50584 \begin_layout Standard
50585 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50586 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50592 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50593 LatexCommand printindex